manualshive.com logo in svg

YASKAWA CR700, Technical Manual, Page: 262 / 886

Share
Download
YASKAWA CR700 Technical Manual Download Page 262

4.2 European Standards

262

YASKAWA

SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual

Three-Phase 400 V Class

Table 4.7 Recommended Fuse (Three-Phase 400 V Class)

Drive Model

Fuse

Manufacturer: Bussmann

Model

Qty

4002

FWH-50B

3

4003

FWH-50B

2

4005

FWH-50B

2

4006

FWH-60B

2

4007

FWH-60B

2

4009

FWH-60B

2

4015

FWH-80B

2

4018

FWH-90B

2

4024

FWH-150B

2

4031

FWH-200B

2

4039

FWH-200B

2

4045

FWH-225A

2

4060

FWH-250A

2

4075

FWH-275A

2

4091

FWH-275A

2

4112

FWH-300A

FWH-325A

*1

2

4150

FWH-400A

FWH-450A

*1

2

4180

FWH-500A

FWH-600A

*1

2

4216

FWH-600A

FWH-700A

*1

2

4260

FWH-700A

FWH-800A

*1

2

4304

FWH-800A

FWH-1000B

*1

2

4371

FWH-1000B

FWH-1200B

*1

2

4414

FWH-1200B

FWH-1400A

*1

2

4453

FWH-1200B

FWH-1600A

*1

2

4605

FWH-1600A

2

*1

Yaskawa recommends a fuse with a large rated current for applications with repeated loads.

◆

EMC Directive

Drives with built-in EMC filters (models 2xxxB, 4xxxB) were tested in accordance with European standard IEC/

EN 61800-3:2004/A1:2012, and comply with the EMC Directive.
Use drives with built-in EMC filters or install external EMC filters to the drive input side to comply with the

EMC Directive. Refer to

Installing the External EMC Noise Filter on page 268

for the installation of the EMC

filter.

■

Install a Drive to Conform to the EMC Directive

Install drive models 2xxxB and 4xxxB with this procedure to comply with the EMC Directive when the drive is a

single unit or installed in a larger device.

1.

Install the drive on a grounded metal plate.

Summary of Contents for CR700

Page 1: ......

Page 2: ...This Page Intentionally Blank 2 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual ...

Page 3: ...0 2 2 Installation Environment 33 2 3 Installation Orientation and Spacing 34 2 4 Moving the Drive 36 Using the Hanging Brackets to Move the Drive 36 Instructions on Drive Suspension 36 2 5 Drive Watt Loss 38 2 6 Remove and Reattach the Keypad 40 Remove the Keypad 40 Reattach the Keypad 40 2 7 Install the Keypad in a Control Panel or Another Device 41 Operate the Keypad from a Remote Location 41 C...

Page 4: ...al A3 to PTC Input 113 Select Output Signals for Multi Function Analog Output Terminals FM AM 113 Switch ON Termination Resistor for MEMOBUS Modbus Communications 113 2 16 Connect the Drive to a PC 115 2 17 Braking Resistor Installation 116 Installing a Braking Resistor ERF Type 116 Installing a Braking Resistor Unit LKEB Type 116 Installing a Braking Unit Connection CDBR Type 117 Connect Braking ...

Page 5: ...s Backed Up to the Keypad 164 Check Modified Parameters 165 Restore Modified Parameters to Defaults 166 Show Fault History 168 Auto Tuning the Drive 168 Set the Keypad Language Display 171 Set the Date and Time 171 Disable the Initial Setup Screen 173 Start Data Logging 174 Configuring the Data Log Content 175 Set Backlight to Automatically Turn OFF 177 Show Information about the Drive 178 Write A...

Page 6: ...ut Frequency Is Not As High As Frequency Reference 230 Drive Frequency Reference Differs from the Controller Frequency Reference Command 231 Large Inconsistency in Stopping Position Due to the Load Rate 231 Deceleration Takes Longer Than Expected When Dynamic Braking Is Enabled 231 The Motor Rotates after the Drive Output Is Shut Off 231 Suspension Drops Falls 231 Load Slips at Start 232 Load Slip...

Page 7: ...Test Run Checklist 242 4 Standards Compliance 245 4 1 Section Safety 246 4 2 European Standards 248 CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance 248 EMC Directive 262 4 3 UL Standards 273 Area of Use 273 Wiring to the Main Circuit Terminal 273 Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals 288 Drive Motor Overload and Overheat Protection 288 4 4 China RoHS Compliance 293 Information on Hazardous Substanc...

Page 8: ...ulation Fans Used 389 Fan Replacement Procedure A 389 Fan Replacement Procedure B 391 Fan Replacement Procedure C 394 Fan Replacement Procedure D 396 Fan Replacement Procedure E 398 Fan Replacement Procedure F 400 Fan Replacement Procedure G 405 7 5 Replace the Drive 414 About the Control Circuit Terminal Block 414 Replace the Drive 414 7 6 Replace the Keypad Battery 419 7 7 Storage Guidelines 421...

Page 9: ...quency 480 d4 Frequency Ref Up Down Hold 480 d6 Field Forcing 481 d7 Offset Frequency 481 10 8 E Motor Parameters 482 E1 V f Pattern for Motor 1 482 E2 Motor Parameters 483 E3 V f Pattern for Motor 2 484 E4 Motor 2 Parameters 485 E7 Motor 3 Parameters 485 10 9 F Options 487 F1 Encoder Option Setup 487 F2 Analog Input Option 488 F3 Digital Input Option 489 F4 Analog Output Option 490 F5 Digital Out...

Page 10: ...nertia Tuning 538 10 16 U Monitors 539 U1 Operation Status Monitors 539 U2 Fault Trace 541 U3 Fault History 543 U4 Maintenance Monitors 544 U6 Operation Status Monitors 548 10 17 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with A1 02 Control Method Selection 551 10 18 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with E3 01 Motor 2 Control Mode Selection 554 10 19 Parameters Changed by E1 ...

Page 11: ...0 H2 Digital Outputs 701 H2 MFDO Parameters 704 MFDO Setting Values 711 H3 Analog Inputs 724 H3 MFAI Parameters 725 Multi Function Analog Input Terminal Settings 730 H4 Analog Outputs 734 H5 Memobus Modbus Communication 737 H7 Virtual MFIO Selection 741 11 9 L Protection Function 745 L1 Motor Protection 745 L2 Power Loss Ride Through 750 L3 Stall Prevention 750 L4 Speed Detection 757 L7 Torque Lim...

Page 12: ...12 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual T3 ASR and Inertia Tuning 803 Index 805 Revision History 813 ...

Page 13: ... the use of this product Failure to obey these precautions can cause serious injury or death or damage to the product or related devices and systems Yaskawa must not be held responsible for any injury or equipment damage as a result of the failure to observe these precautions and instructions i 1 Receiving 14 i 2 Using the Product Safely 15 i 3 Warranty Information 18 ...

Page 14: ...ut MFAI Multi Function Analog Input MFAO Multi Function Analog Output Registered Trademarks CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation CIA CC Link is a registered trademark of CC Link Partner Association DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA EtherNet IP is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA MECHATROLINK I MEC...

Page 15: ...rive Put back all covers and shields before operation Use options and drives only as indicated in the instructions described in this manual The diagrams in this manual are provided as examples only They may not pertain to all products covered by this manual Yaskawa can change the products specifications and content of the instructions without notice to make the product and or the instructions bett...

Page 16: ...rious injury or death Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized If you touch the internal components of an energized drive it can cause serious injury or death Damage to Equipment Do not apply incorrect voltage to the main circuit of the drive Operate the drive in the specified range of the input voltage on the drive nameplate Voltages that are higher than the permi...

Page 17: ... have the correct insulation it can cause a short circuit or ground fault from insulation deterioration Do not operate a drive or connected equipment that has damaged or missing parts You can cause damage to the drive and connected equipment Do not use steam or other disinfectants to fumigate wood for packaging the drive Use alternative methods for example heat treatment before you package the com...

Page 18: ... if you are considering the application of this product for special purposes such as machines or systems used for passenger cars medicine airplanes and aerospace nuclear power electric power or undersea relaying WARNING Injury to Personnel When you use this product in applications where its failure could cause the loss of human life a serious accident or physical injury you must install applicable...

Page 19: ...This chapter gives information about the different drive models and features and how to examine the drive when you receive it 1 1 Section Safety 20 1 2 Crane Application Instructions 21 1 3 Model Number and Nameplate Check 22 1 4 Control Method Type and Corresponding Features 26 ...

Page 20: ...ive CR700 Technical Manual 1 1 Section Safety DANGER Do not ignore the safety messages in this manual If you ignore the safety messages in this manual it will cause serious injury or death The manufacturer is not responsible for injuries or damage to equipment ...

Page 21: ...If the machine does not move this way crane software functions and performance will be reversed making it impossible to take full advantage of the drive performance and capabilities If the direction of motor rotation is not consistent with machinery do all these procedures to correct the direction of motor rotation Change two phases of the main circuit cables connecting the motor and drive In Clos...

Page 22: ...L section of the drive nameplate to make sure that you received the correct model If you received the incorrect product or a product with a defect contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative Nameplate A Hardware revision B Weight C Drive software version D The address of the head office of Yaskawa Electric Corporation E Accreditation standards F Ambient temperature G Protection design H S...

Page 23: ...antee complete protection for the environmental conditions shown 9 Design revision order 10 Control circuit terminal board G 10 digital input screw clamp terminal board type 11 Option connector CN5 A A No option D AI A3 Analog Input E DI A3 Digital Input F SI C3 CC Link G SI ET3 MECHATROLINK III H SI N3 DeviceNet J SI P3 PROFIBUS DP K SI T3 MECHATROLINK II M SI S3 CANopen S SI EP3 PROFINET Communi...

Page 24: ... the carrier frequency Have high ambient temperature Install drives side by side Table 1 2 Rated Output Current Three Phase AC 200 V Symbol Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW Rated Output Current A 003 0 55 3 2 005 0 75 5 008 1 5 8 011 2 2 11 014 3 0 14 018 4 0 17 5 025 5 5 25 033 7 5 33 047 11 47 060 15 60 075 18 5 75 088 22 88 115 30 115 145 37 145 180 45 180 215 55 215 283 75 283 346 90 346 415...

Page 25: ...KAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual 25 Symbol Maximum Applicable Motor Output kW Rated Output Current A 091 45 91 112 55 112 150 75 150 180 90 180 216 110 216 260 132 260 304 160 304 371 200 371 414 220 414 453 250 453 605 315 605 ...

Page 26: ...on controller to prevent movement caused by external force Feed Forward Control No No Improves speed accuracy when the load changes by compensating effects of the system inertia Overexcitation Deceleration 1 Yes Yes Decreases the deceleration time by increasing motor loss by setting V f higher than the setting value during deceleration 1 Motor loss increases during overexcitation braking and high ...

Page 27: ...rive capacity accordingly 2 Note these points when you use this function When you can decouple the motor and machine for a test run use Rotational Auto Tuning You must make adjustments to the control in the range where there is no vibration in the machine after Rotational Auto Tuning For vector control use a 1 1 drive to motor ratio You cannot use vector control when more than one motor is connect...

Page 28: ...1 4 Control Method Type and Corresponding Features 28 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual ...

Page 29: ...l or Another Device 41 2 8 Removing Reattaching Covers 46 2 9 Change the Drive Enclosure Type 51 2 10 Installation Methods 67 2 11 Electrical Installation 71 2 12 Main Circuit Wiring 74 2 13 Main Circuit Terminal Block Wiring Procedure 94 2 14 Control Circuit Wiring 100 2 15 Control I O Connections 112 2 16 Connect the Drive to a PC 115 2 17 Braking Resistor Installation 116 2 18 Drive Wiring Prot...

Page 30: ...aluminum wire If you do not obey the standards and regulations it can cause serious injury or death The leakage current of the drive will be more than 3 5 mA in drive models 2xxxB 4xxxB and 4317A to 4605A When there is a DC component in the protective earthing conductor the drive can cause a residual current When a residual current operated protective or monitoring device prevents direct or indire...

Page 31: ...nnel operate a crane or hoist it can cause serious injury or death from falling equipment Before you hang the drive vertically use screws to correctly attach the drive front cover and other drive components If you do not secure the front cover it can fall and cause minor injury When you use a crane or hoist to lift the drive during installation or removal prevent more than 1 96 m s2 0 2 G vibratio...

Page 32: ...ate the motor Motor or system resonant vibration can occur in fixed speed machines that are converted to variable speed Too much vibration can cause damage to equipment The motor may require more acceleration torque with drive operation than with a commercial power supply Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the motor You can use the drive with an explosion proof mo...

Page 33: ... materials away from the drive Altitude 1000 m 3281 ft maximum Note Derate the output current by 1 for each 100 m 328 ft to install the drive in altitudes between 1000 m to 4000 m 3281 ft to 13123 ft It is not necessary to derate the rated voltage in these conditions Installing the drive at 2000 m 6562 ft or lower Installing the drive between 2000 m to 4000m 6562 ft to 13123 ft and grounding the n...

Page 34: ...fficient space for wiring and airflow A At least 50 mm 2 in B At least 30 mm 1 2 in on both sides C At least 120 mm 4 7 in above and below D Airflow direction Figure 2 2 Drive Installation Space Single Unit Mounting Multiple Drives Side by Side Drive models 2003xB to 2075xB and 4002xB to 4039xB can take advantage of side by side installation When installing other drive models ensure that enough sp...

Page 35: ...tallation Space Side by Side Mounting Note If the dimensions of the drives differ when using a side by side installation then line up the tops of all the drives This makes it easier to replace the cooling fan later If mounting an enclosed wall mounted type UL Type 1 drive using a side by side installation completely remove the top protective cover for the drive Refer to Attach the Top Protective C...

Page 36: ...injury WARNING Crush Hazard When you use a crane or hoist to lift the drive during installation or removal prevent more than 1 96 m s2 0 2 G vibration or impact Too much vibration or impact can cause serious injury or death from falling equipment WARNING Crush Hazard When you lift the drive during installation or removal do not try to turn the drive over and do not ignore the hanging drive If you ...

Page 37: ... distance Horizontal Suspension If a horizontal suspension is required in the installation environment hang the drive through the following steps Put the drive on the ground horizontally Connect wires to the 4 hanging brackets and use a crane to lift the drive NOTICE When you attach a horizontal lifting cable or chain to the drive use a jig or pad between the wire and the drive The wire can scratc...

Page 38: ...2 265 748 1013 2180 180 2 297 935 1232 2215 215 2 362 1144 1506 2283 283 2 459 1508 1967 2346 346 2 520 1769 2289 2415 415 2 603 2216 2819 Table 2 2 Drive Watt Loss 400 V Class Model The rated output current A Carrier Frequency kHz Interior Unit Loss W Cooling Fin Loss W Total Loss W 4002 1 8 2 13 14 27 4003 3 4 2 12 18 30 4005 4 8 2 21 32 53 4006 5 5 2 28 50 78 4007 7 2 2 35 70 105 4009 9 2 2 44 ...

Page 39: ...A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual 39 Model The rated output current A Carrier Frequency kHz Interior Unit Loss W Cooling Fin Loss W Total Loss W 4304 304 2 728 2075 2803 4371 371 2 976 2778 3754 4414 414 2 1118 3133 4251 4453 453 2 1272 3559 4831 4605 605 2 1495 4500 5995 ...

Page 40: ...correct operation Remove the Keypad 1 Push down the tab on the top of the keypad then pull the keypad forward and remove it from the drive Figure 2 7 Remove the Keypad 2 Pull the keypad connector out from the drive horizontally then put it in the holder Note Insert the end of the keypad connector that has the tab A Holder B Hook C Keypad connector Figure 2 8 Move the Keypad Connector to the Holder...

Page 41: ...e the information in Table 2 3 to install the keypad in the best location for your application Table 2 3 Keypad Installation Method Installation Method Features Necessary Tools and Installation Support Sets Outside of the control panel Simplified installation is possible Separate installation support sets are not necessary Phillips screwdriver 2 M3 Inside of the control panel Keypad does not exten...

Page 42: ...8 3 07 22 0 89 29 1 14 22 0 89 1 0 04 3 6 0 14 2 Remove the keypad and put the keypad connector in the holder on the front cover Note Insert the end of the keypad connector that has the tab A Keypad B Keypad connector C Holder Figure 2 12 Remove the Keypad 3 Put the keypad on the outside of the control panel Use M3 screws 6 mm 0 2 in depth cross recessed pan head screws to attach the keypad from t...

Page 43: ...ccessories contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative Note The installation procedure and panel cut out dimensions are the same for mounting brackets A and B Use a gasket between the control panel and the keypad in environments with a large quantity of dust or other unwanted airborne material 1 Use the dimensions in Figure 2 15 and Table 2 6 to cut an opening in the control panel for the...

Page 44: ... tightening torque M3 screws 0 49 N m to 0 73 N m 4 34 lbf in to 6 46 lbf in A Keypad B Mounting bracket A C M3 screws D Screw mounting holes Figure 2 17 Attach Keypad to Mounting Bracket 4 Put the mounting bracket that has the attached keypad in the control panel and use the screws to attach it from the outside Use the screws included with the installation support set to attach it Tighten the scr...

Page 45: ...ther Device YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual 45 5 Use the extension cable to connect the drive to the keypad A Extension cable B Communications connector C Drive D Keypad E Cable connector Figure 2 19 Connecting the Drive and Keypad with the Extension Cable ...

Page 46: ... Before servicing disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de energized The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc When all indicators are OFF remove the covers before measuring for dangerous voltages to make sure that the drive is safe If...

Page 47: ...e original position Removing Reattaching the Cover Using Procedure B DANGER Electrical Shock Hazard Do not examine connect or disconnect wiring on an energized drive Before servicing disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de energized The charge indicator LED extinguishes when t...

Page 48: ...front cover B Unhook the tabs found on the sides of the front cover Figure 2 26 Pull Forward to Remove the Front Cover 4 Remove the front cover from the drive Figure 2 27 Remove the Front Cover Reattach the Front Cover Wire the drive and other peripheral devices then reattach the front cover Note Wire the grounding terminals first main circuit terminals next and control circuit terminals last 1 Mo...

Page 49: ... pull down on the cover CAUTION Crush Hazard Loosen the cover screws Do not fully remove them If you fully remove the cover screws the terminal cover can fall and cause moderate injury Figure 2 30 Loosen the Terminal Cover Mounting Screws 2 Pull the terminal cover away from the drive Figure 2 31 Remove the Terminal Cover Reattach the Terminal Cover Wire the drive and other peripheral devices then ...

Page 50: ...2 8 Removing Reattaching Covers 50 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual Figure 2 32 Reattach the Terminal Cover ...

Page 51: ...s WARNING Injury to Personnel Carefully move the screwdriver to remove the knock out holes If you use too much pressure on the circular metal plates they can eject and cause injury CAUTION Injury to Personnel Use a file to remove sharp edges from the knock out hole If you touch the rough edges it can cause injury Note Remove the knock out holes on the UL Type 1 base before you install the conduit ...

Page 52: ... install the protective covers to the drive A Screws Figure 2 34 Remove the Screws that Install the Protective Cover 2 Remove the knock out holes on the UL Type 1 base before you install the kit Refer to Remove the Knock Out Holes on page 51 for more information 3 Align the screw holes of the UL Type 1 base with the screw holes on the drive and safety the UL Type 1 base to the drive with the screw...

Page 53: ...ve front cover Attach the Protective Cover Procedure B Install the Top Protective Cover Insert the back hooks on the back side of the top protective cover into the replacement holes on the rear side of the drive Then put the front hooks into the replacement holes on the front side of the drive Note Install the top protective cover and make sure that the mark on the upper surface of the top protect...

Page 54: ...ety the Base 2 Use the included screws to install the UL Type 1 conduit bracket to the base Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in A Conduit bracket B M4 10 pan head screws Figure 2 40 Install the Conduit Bracket 3 Use the included screws to install the front cover to the base Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 0 98 N m to ...

Page 55: ...orary placement holes Figure 2 42 Install the Top Protective Cover Install the Conduit Bracket Remove the knock out holes on the UL Type 1 base before you install it to the drive Refer to Remove the Knock Out Holes on page 51 for more information 1 Use the included screws to install the UL Type 1 base on the drive Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque M5 14 pan head screws 1 96 N m to ...

Page 56: ... in to 11 77 lbf in A Front cover B M4 10 truss head screws Figure 2 45 Install the Front Cover Attach the Protective Cover Procedure D Install the Top Protective Cover Put the hooks on the back of the top protective cover into the hook holes on the top of the drive Move the top protective cover forward to align the screw holes Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m...

Page 57: ... tightening torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in A Stay brackets B M4 8 pan head screws Figure 2 47 Install the Stay Brackets 2 Use the included screws to install the UL Type 1 base on the stay brackets Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in A M4 8 pan head screws B Base Figure 2 48 Install the Base on the Stay Brackets...

Page 58: ...igure 2 50 Install the Conduit Bracket 5 Use the included screws to install the front cover to the base While slightly lifting the front cover tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in A Front cover B M4 10 truss head screws Figure 2 51 Install the Front Cover Attach the Protective Cover Procedure E Install the Top Protective Cover Put the h...

Page 59: ...ts before you install the kit Remove the knock out holes on the UL Type 1 base before you install it to the drive Refer to Remove the Knock Out Holes on page 51 for more information 1 Use the included screws to assemble the stay brackets Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in A Stay brackets B M4 8 pan head screws Figure 2 53 Install the ...

Page 60: ...ed bolts to install the UL Type 1 base to the drive Tighten the bolts to a correct tightening torque M6 16 upset bolts 3 92 N m to 4 90 N m 34 70 lbf in to 43 37 lbf in M8 16 hex bolts 8 83 N m to 10 79 N m 78 15 lbf in to 95 49 lbf in A M6 16 upset head bolts B M8 16 hex bolts C M8 plain washers D Base Figure 2 55 Safety the Base 4 Use the included screws to install the UL Type 1 conduit bracket ...

Page 61: ...ferent models 100 192 121 007 4 screws 100 192 121 008 6 screws A Front cover B M4 10 truss head screws Figure 2 57 Install the Front Cover Attach the Protective Cover Procedure F Install the Top Protective Cover Note The appearance is different for different drives but the installation procedures are the same Align the screw holes of the top protective cover with the screw holes on the drive and ...

Page 62: ...e you install the kit Remove the knock out holes on the UL Type 1 base before you install it to the drive Refer to Remove the Knock Out Holes on page 51 for more information 1 Use the included screws to assemble the stay brackets Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 1 96 N m to 2 53 N m 17 35 lbf in to 22 39 lbf in A Stay brackets B M5 12 pan head screws Figure 2 59 Install the Stay B...

Page 63: ...2 53 N m 17 35 lbf in to 22 39 lbf in A M5 12 pan head screws Figure 2 61 Safety the Base 4 Use the included screws to install the UL Type 1 conduit bracket to the base Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in A Conduit bracket B M4 10 pan head screws Figure 2 62 Install the Conduit Bracket 5 Use the included screws to install the front cov...

Page 64: ...nd safety the top protective cover to the drive with the included screws Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in A M4 10 pan head screws Figure 2 64 Install the Top Protective Cover Install the Conduit Bracket Remove the drive hanging brackets before you install the kit Remove the knock out holes on the UL Type 1 base before you install it...

Page 65: ...install the UL Type 1 base on the stay brackets Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in A M4 14 pan head screws B Base Figure 2 66 Install the Base on the Stay Brackets 3 Use the included screws to install the UL Type 1 base to the drive Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in A M4...

Page 66: ...ning torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in A Conduit bracket B M4 10 pan head screws Figure 2 68 Install the Conduit Bracket 5 Use the included screws to install the front cover to the base While slightly lifting the front cover tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in A Front cover B M4 10 truss head screws Figure 2 69 In...

Page 67: ...ternal dimensions and installation methods External Heatsink Refer to Table 2 9 and Table 2 10 for the panel cut out dimensions for external heatsink installations Drive models smaller than 2075 and 4045 must use an attachment for panel through mounting Note The exterior mounting dimensions and installation dimensions for a standard installation are different than the dimensions for an external he...

Page 68: ...3 9 17 M5 2005 1 140 5 51 294 11 57 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 16 0 630 3 0 118 282 11 10 23 0 906 6 0 236 26 1 02 6 0 236 134 5 28 233 9 17 M5 2008 1 140 5 51 294 11 57 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 16 0 630 3 0 118 282 11 10 23 0 906 6 0 236 26 1 02 6 0 236 134 5 28 233 9 17 M5 2011 1 140 5 51 294 11 57 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 16 0 630 3 0 118 282 11 10 23 0 906 6 0 236 2...

Page 69: ...10 00 218 8 58 370 14 57 310 12 20 23 0 91 12 0 472 773 30 43 31 5 1 240 14 0 551 31 5 1 24 13 0 512 416 16 38 710 27 95 M12 2415 440 17 32 800 31 50 254 10 00 218 8 58 370 14 57 310 12 20 23 0 91 12 0 472 773 30 43 31 5 1 240 14 0 551 31 5 1 24 13 0 512 416 16 38 710 27 95 M12 1 The attachment for external heatsink installation is necessary Table 2 10 Panel Cut Out Dimensions 400 V Class Model Di...

Page 70: ... 1 26 13 0 512 296 11 65 610 24 02 M10 4216 312 12 28 700 27 56 260 10 24 160 6 30 218 8 58 263 10 35 39 1 54 8 0 315 675 26 56 33 1 299 12 0 472 32 1 26 13 0 512 296 11 65 610 24 02 M10 4260 312 12 28 700 27 56 260 10 24 160 6 30 218 8 58 263 10 35 39 1 54 8 0 315 675 26 56 33 1 299 12 0 472 32 1 26 13 0 512 296 11 65 610 24 02 M10 4304 440 17 32 800 31 50 254 10 00 218 8 58 370 14 57 310 12 20 2...

Page 71: ...an cause serious injury or death WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard Use the terminals for the drive only for their intended purpose Refer to the technical manual for more information about the I O terminals Wiring and grounding incorrectly or modifying the cover may damage the equipment or cause injury Standard Connection Diagram Wire the drive as specified by Figure 2 71 WARNING Sudden Movement Haza...

Page 72: ...2 11 Electrical Installation 72 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual Figure 2 71 Standard Drive Connection Diagram ...

Page 73: ... motor forward FWD it hoists a load and reverse REV when it lowers a load in all control methods 14 When the external baseblock command is ON the drive releases the baseblock 15 To set the MFDI power supply Sinking Sourcing Mode or internal external power supply install or remove a jumper between terminals SC SP or SC SN depending on the application NOTICE Damage to Equipment Do not close the circ...

Page 74: ...Shock Hazard Do not connect terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 3 B1 or B2 to the ground terminal If you connect these terminals to earth ground it can cause damage to the drive or serious injury or death Note The location of terminals are different for different drive models A DC bus terminal B Connect to the drive ground terminal C Ground the motor case D Three Phase Motor E Use R S T fo...

Page 75: ...chnical Manual 75 Model Diagram 4075 Figure 2 80 2115 4091 Figure 2 81 2145 2180 4112 4150 Figure 2 82 2215 2283 and 4180 to 4260 Figure 2 83 2346 2415 4304 4371 Figure 2 84 4414 to 4605 Figure 2 85 Figure 2 73 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 74 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block ...

Page 76: ... 12 Main Circuit Wiring 76 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual Figure 2 75 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 76 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block ...

Page 77: ...ircuit Wiring YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual 77 Figure 2 77 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 78 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 79 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block ...

Page 78: ...SKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual Figure 2 80 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 81 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 82 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block ...

Page 79: ... Technical Manual 79 Figure 2 83 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 84 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 85 Configuration of Main Circuit Terminal Block Main Circuit Terminal Functions Refer to the following table for drive main circuit terminals and functions R L1 T L3 ...

Page 80: ...ards and local safety regulations The IEC EN 61800 5 1 2007 standard specifies that you must wire the power supply to automatically de energize when the protective ground wire disconnects You can also connect a protective ground wire that has a minimum cross sectional area of 10 mm2 copper wire or 16 mm2 aluminum wire If you do not obey the standards and regulations it can cause serious injury or ...

Page 81: ...Do not connect other items to these terminals Refer to the instruction manual for each device for recommended wire gauges to connect peripheral devices or options to terminals 1 2 3 B1 and B2 Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative if the recommended wire gauges for the peripheral devices or options are out of the range of the applicable gauges for the drive Three Phase 200 V Class Mo...

Page 82: ...2 5 5 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 3 5 2 8 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 2018 R L1 S L2 T L3 8 2 14 2 14 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 3 5 2 14 2 14 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 8 2 22 2 22 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 2 2 5 5 2 5 5 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 3 5 3 5 8 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 2025 R L1 S L2 T L3 14 2 14 2 14 10 M4 ...

Page 83: ... B2 14 2 14 2 14 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 8 8 22 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 2075 R L1 S L2 T L3 50 2 50 22 50 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 U T1 V T2 W T3 30 2 30 14 30 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 1 2 60 2 60 22 60 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 B1 B2 14 2 14 2 14 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 14 14 22 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 ...

Page 84: ...8 Hex socket cap WAF 6 mm 8 9 71 80 22 22 60 M8 Hex bolt slotted 9 0 11 79 7 97 4 2215 R L1 S L2 T L3 60 2P 22 100 2P 80 100 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 U T1 V T2 W T3 50 2P 22 100 2P 80 100 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 1 80 2P 30 125 2P 100 125 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 3 50 2P 22 60 2P 50 60 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 22 22 200 M10 Hex bolt slotted 18 23 159 204 228...

Page 85: ...e is the wire gauge for one terminal 5 A junction terminal is necessary to connect a braking unit CDBR series to terminals and 3 Three Phase 400 V Class Model Terminal Recomm Gauge mm2 Applicable Gauge IP20 Applicable Gauge 1 mm2 Wire Stripping Length 2 mm Terminal Screw Tightening Torque N m lbf in Size Shape 4002 R L1 S L2 T L3 2 2 14 2 14 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 2 14 2 14...

Page 86: ... 5 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 3 5 2 8 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 4009 R L1 S L2 T L3 2 2 14 2 14 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 2 14 2 14 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 3 5 2 22 2 22 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 2 2 5 5 2 5 5 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 3 5 2 8 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 4015 R L1 S L2 T L3 3 5 2 14 2 14 10 M4 Slot...

Page 87: ...WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 B1 B2 5 5 2 14 2 14 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 8 5 5 14 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 4039 R L1 S L2 T L3 14 2 14 3 5 14 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 U T1 V T2 W T3 14 2 14 5 5 14 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 1 2 22 2 22 3 5 22 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 8 2 8 2 8 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 8 8 22 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1...

Page 88: ...Hex bolt 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 4112 R L1 S L2 T L3 60 50 100 80 100 37 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm 12 14 107 124 U T1 V T2 W T3 60 50 125 80 125 37 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm 12 14 107 124 1 1 4 30 22 50 50 28 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 8 9 71 80 B1 B2 5 50 30 80 50 80 28 M8 Hex socket cap WAF 6 mm 8 9 71 80 22 22 60 M8 Hex bolt slotted 9 0 11 79 7 97 4 4150 R L1 S L2 T L3 80 50 100 80 100 37 M10 Hex...

Page 89: ...60 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 30 30 200 M10 Hex bolt slotted 18 23 159 204 4304 R L1 S L2 T L3 125 2P 60 125 2P 125 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 U T1 V T2 W T3 125 2P 60 125 2P 125 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 1 125 2P 100 150 2P 150 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 3 100 2P 38 150 2P 150 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 38 30 200 M12 Hex bolt slotted 32 40 283 354 4371 R L...

Page 90: ...or when you connect the motor to drive output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 If the phase order is incorrect it can cause the motor to run in reverse If the motor accidentally runs in reverse it can cause serious injury or death NOTICE Use the drive ground wire to ground the drive only Do not try to use the drive ground wire for other devices for example welding machines or large current electrical ...

Page 91: ... you install more than one drive connected to the same ground circuit obey the grounding instructions Incorrect equipment grounding can cause drive or equipment malfunction from electrical interference NOTICE Use conduit or metal cable tray dividers to isolate motor wires U T1 V T2 and W T3 from all other wires to decrease the risk of problems from electrical interference If motor wires are adjace...

Page 92: ...2 12 Main Circuit Wiring 92 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual Figure 2 87 Drive Main Circuit Configuration Figure 2 88 Drive Main Circuit Configuration ...

Page 93: ...chnical Manual 93 Figure 2 89 Drive Main Circuit Configuration Figure 2 90 Drive Main Circuit Configuration Protection of Main Circuit Terminals When you wire the main circuit terminals do not let cable ends go near terminals or the drive If you use crimped terminals make sure that you also use insulation caps ...

Page 94: ...g lengths shown in the manual Do not use bent or crushed wires Remove the damaged end of the wire before you use it Do not solder stranded wire If you use stranded wire make sure that all of the wire strands are in the connection Also do not twist the stranded wire too much Put the wire all the way into the terminal block Remove the insulation from the wire to the recommended wire stripping length...

Page 95: ...cturer M4 Slotted Bit SF BIT SL 1 0X4 0 70 PHOENIX CONTACT TSD M 3NM 1 2 3 N m 10 6 26 6 lbf in M5 1 Slotted Bit SF BIT SL 1 2X6 5 70 PHOENIX CONTACT Wire Gauge 25 mm2 AWG 10 TSD M 3NM 1 2 3 N m 10 6 26 6 lbf in Wire Gauge 25 mm2 AWG 10 Wire Gauge 30 mm2 AWG 8 Wire Gauge 30 mm2 AWG 8 4 1 4 5 N m 36 3 39 8 lbf in 2 3 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm Bit SF BIT HEX 5 50 PHOENIX CONTACT 5 9 N m 44 3 79 9 l...

Page 96: ...e is a jumper between terminals 1 and 2 loosen the terminal block screws and remove the jumper before wiring the terminals 3 Tighten the screws to the specified torque Figure 2 96 Tighten Terminal Block Screws 4 Examine the signal from the wired terminal and use a diagonal cutting pliers to remove areas of the wiring cover cutaway section To remove the wiring cover cut off the portion shown in Fig...

Page 97: ... in its initial position Put the cables through the holes cut from the wiring cover Figure 2 98 Reattach the Wiring Cover 6 Install the front cover and the keypad to their initial positions Wire the Main Circuit Terminal Block with Procedure B Notes on Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Note After the wiring do not twist or shake the electrical wires too much Be sure to use only wires with the...

Page 98: ...circuit terminal block Figure 2 101 Install the Electrical Wire 4 Tighten the nut to the specified torque Figure 2 102 Tighten the Terminal Block Nut 5 Examine the signal from the wired terminal and use a diagonal cutting pliers to remove areas of the wiring cover cutaway section Cut the areas shown in Figure 2 103 A Cutaway sections B Use a diagonal cutting pliers to clip this area Figure 2 103 C...

Page 99: ... out and cause injury Make sure that the clipped section does not cause damage to the wires Although the wiring cover is correct if you use wires that are not specified by Yaskawa the drive will not keep its IP20 protective level When you use the recommended gauge for the electrical wires it is not necessary to attach the wiring cover of the main circuit power input terminal and the drive output t...

Page 100: ...tion gives information about how to correctly wire the control circuit Control Circuit Connection Diagram Wire the drive control circuit as shown in Figure 2 105 Figure 2 105 Control Circuit Connection Diagram 1 Connect a 24 V power supply to terminals PS AC to operate the control circuit while the main circuit power supply is OFF ...

Page 101: ...he drive chassis Failure to comply may cause malfunction or failure 6 Do not connect terminals PS and AC inversely If you connect the wires to the incorrect terminals it will cause damage to the drive 7 Set DIP switch S2 to the ON position to enable the termination resistor in the last drive in a MEMOBUS Modbus communications 8 To use the internal power supply with the Safe Disable input use sourc...

Page 102: ... drive SC Multi function input selection common SP Multi function input power supply 24 Vdc Safe Disable Input H1 Safe Disable input 1 Remove the jumper between terminals H1 HC and H2 HC when using the Safe Disable input 24 V 6 mA ON Normal operation OFF Coasting motor Internal impedance 4 7 kΩ OFF time of at least 2 ms H2 Safe Disable input 2 HC Safe Disable function common Master Frequency Refer...

Page 103: ...l Ensure the diode rating is greater than the circuit voltage C1 P2 Multi function photocoupler output Minor Fault C2 A External power 48 V max B Flywheel diode C Coil D 50 mA or less Figure 2 106 Connecting a Flywheel Diode Table 2 17 Control Circuit Monitor Output Terminals Mode Terminals Name Default Function Signal Level Monitor output FM Analog monitor output 1 Output frequency Voltage output...

Page 104: ... the same as when the main circuit power supply is ON The operations of MFDO terminals and fault relay output terminals set for H2 xx E 10E Fault are different for different drive software versions 3 Encoder Option Speed Detection PG B3 PG X3 PG RT3 Encoder options do not operate when the main circuit power supply of the drive is OFF The operation to detect encoder option related faults is differe...

Page 105: ...d and the main circuit power supply is de energized re energize the 24 V control power supply and energize the main circuit power supply 6 When you use an external 24 V power supply the operation of the Analog Output option is different for different drive software versions On drives with software versions PRG 01021 and later the Analog Output option AO A3 can output the analog signals Note The PR...

Page 106: ...OBUS Modbus communications Use an RS 485 cable to connect the drive Note Set DIP switch S2 to ON to enable the termination resistor in the last drive in a MEMOBUS Modbus network RS 485 MEMOBUS Modbus communication protocol Maximum 115 2 kbps D Communication output AC Shield ground 0 V Terminal Configuration Control circuit terminals should are arranged as shown in the following figure A Terminal b...

Page 107: ... torque for the terminal screws is shown on the reverse side or the lower front side of the drive front cover Table 2 21 Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques Terminal Screw Size Tightening Torque N m lbf in Bare Wire Crimp Ferrule Recomm Gauge mm2 AWG Applicable Gauge mm2 AWG Recomm Gauge mm2 AWG Applicable Gauge mm2 AWG S1 S10 SC SN SP H1 H2 HC SN V V A1 A2 A3 AC MA MB MC M1 M6 P1 C1 P...

Page 108: ...her control circuit wiring If contact output terminal wiring is adjacent to other control circuit wiring it can cause incorrect operation of the drive and equipment from electrical interference Use a Class 2 power supply to connect external power to the control terminals If the power supply for peripheral devices is incorrect it can cause a decrease in drive performance Connect the shield of shiel...

Page 109: ...n all terminal screws to the correct tightening torque Connections that are too loose or too tight can cause incorrect operation and damage to the drive Incorrect connections can also cause death or serious injury from fire Note Use shielded twisted pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive Incorrect equipment grounding can cause drive or equipment malfunction from elect...

Page 110: ...ht can cause incorrect operation and damage to the drive Incorrect connections can also cause death or serious injury from fire Refer to Figure 2 117 for information to prepare terminal ends of the shielded wire Prepare the wire ends of shielded twisted pair wires as shown in Figure 2 117 to use an analog reference from an external frequency setting potentiometer to set the frequency Connect the s...

Page 111: ...ocations of Switches Table 2 23 I O Terminals and Switches Functions Posi tion Switch Terminal Function Default A Dip switch S4 A3 Selects MFAI or PTC input AI analog input B DIP switch S1 A2 Selects the input signal type voltage current I current input C DIP switch S2 Enables or disables the MEMOBUS Modbus communications termination resistor OFF ...

Page 112: ... between terminals SC SP and SC SN to set the sinking mode sourcing mode and the internal external power supply for the MFDI terminals The default setting for the drive is internal power supply sinking mode NOTICE Damage to Equipment Do not close the circuit between terminals SP SN If you close the circuits between terminals SC SP and terminals SC SN at the same time it will cause damage to the dr...

Page 113: ...t Terminal A3 to PTC Input Terminal A3 can be configured either as multi function analog input or as PTC input for motor overload protection Use DIP switch S4 to select the input function Figure 2 121 Location of DIP Switch S4 Terminal Settings for DIP Switches Description A3 AI Default Functions as multi function analog input terminal Select the function with H3 06 Terminal A3 Function Selection ...

Page 114: ...e CR700 Technical Manual Figure 2 122 Location of DIP Switch S2 Table 2 24 MEMOBUS Modbus Communications Termination Resistor Setting DIP Switch S2 Description ON The built in termination resistor is switched ON OFF default The built in termination resistor is switched OFF ...

Page 115: ...i B to connect the drive to a type A USB port on a PC After you connect the drive to the PC you can use Yaskawa DriveWizard Industrial software to monitor drive performance and manage parameter settings A USB 2 0 type A mini B cable B Mini B type connector C Type A connector D PC Figure 2 123 Connect to a PC USB Yaskawa recommends that you use a USB cable with connectors connected with shielded wi...

Page 116: ... the drive make sure that the braking circuit can dissipate the energy for the set deceleration time To install a dynamic braking option set L8 01 0 3 ERF DB Resistor Protection Disabled WARNING Fire Hazard Do not connect a braking resistor to terminals 1 or Use terminals B1 and B2 for the braking resistor connections If you connect a braking resistor to the incorrect terminals it can cause damage...

Page 117: ...raking unit connect the terminal 3 of the drive to the terminal on the braking unit Next wire together the terminal on the drive and braking unit The terminal 2 is not used Set L8 55 0 Internal DB TransistorProtection Disable Note To install a CDBR type braking unit to the drive with a built in braking transistor models 2003 to 2115 4002 to 4150 connect the drive terminal B1 to the terminal on the...

Page 118: ...Gauge 3 35 1 35 1 A Figure 2 128 35 1 35 1 A Figure 2 128 Applicable Gauge 3 50 2P 25 70 2P B Figure 2 129 50 2P 2 25 70 2P 2 B Figure 2 129 2346 2110D 1 Specified Wire Gauge 3 35 1 35 1 C Figure 2 130 35 1 35 1 C Figure 2 130 2415 2110D 1 Specified Wire Gauge 3 35 1 35 1 C Figure 2 130 35 1 35 1 C Figure 2 130 1 When connecting the specified wire for a braking unit CDBR Type 2 This is the applica...

Page 119: ...1 Applicable Gauge 3 80 4P 100 125 4P F Figure 2 133 80 4P 2 100 125 4P 2 F Figure 2 133 4453 4220D 1 Specified Wire Gauge 3 30 1 30 38 1 D Figure 2 131 30 1 30 38 1 D Figure 2 131 Applicable Gauge 3 80 4P 100 125 4P F Figure 2 133 80 4P 2 100 125 4P 2 F Figure 2 133 4605 4220D 2 Specified Wire Gauge 3 30 2P 1 30 38 2P 1 E Figure 2 132 30 2P 1 30 38 2P 1 E Figure 2 132 Applicable Gauge 3 100 4P 10...

Page 120: ...tions A Cutaway sections B Use a diagonal cutting pliers to clip this area Figure 2 130 Cutaway Sections A Cutaway section 1 B Use a diagonal cutting pliers to clip this area Figure 2 131 Cutaway Sections 1 Cut away either of the two portions terminal or terminal 3 You may cut away either portion A Cutaway sections B Use a diagonal cutting pliers to clip this area Figure 2 132 Cutaway Sections ...

Page 121: ...9 for more information Note Different drive models have different wiring covers Only clip the section of the wiring cover that applies to the wired terminal If you clip areas that do not apply to wired terminals the protective enclosure will not keep its IP20 protective level Make sure that you hold the cutaway section tightly when you remove pieces of the cutaway section Pieces of the cutaway sec...

Page 122: ...gure 2 136 Lead the Wire through the Wiring Cover 4 Crimp the closed loop crimp terminal to the wire 5 Remove the main circuit terminal block nut A Nut Figure 2 137 Remove the Terminal Block Nut 6 Wire the closed loop crimp terminal to the main circuit terminal block Figure 2 138 Connect the Wire 7 Tighten the nut to the specified torque Figure 2 139 Tighten the Terminal Block Nut ...

Page 123: ...onnect Braking Units in Parallel When connecting two or more braking units in parallel refer to the following figure to determine the wiring and connector selections On braking units there are connectors for selecting master or slave Select the master side for only the first braking unit For the second unit on select the slave side Figure 2 141 Connect Braking Units in Parallel Dynamic Braking Opt...

Page 124: ...heat Protection Example WARNING Fire Hazard When you use a braking unit use a thermal relay on the braking resistors and set a fault contact output for the braking resistor unit to disconnect drive main power through an input contactor Incorrect braking circuit protection can cause the resistors to become too hot and cause serious injury or death ...

Page 125: ...terminal If the main circuit terminal is energized during wiring it will cause serious injury or death Installing a Residual Current Monitoring Detection RCM RCD When the drive output switches at high speeds it causes high frequency leakage current To prevent electrical shock and fires caused by ground fault protection that is not sufficient install an RCM RCD Use a high frequency RCM RCD at the p...

Page 126: ...l Overload Relay on the Drive Output A thermal overload relay disconnects the power line to the motor during a motor overload condition to prevent damage to the motor Install a thermal overload relay between the drive and motor in these conditions When you operate more than one motor with one drive When you operate the motor directly from the power line with a power line bypass When you operate on...

Page 127: ...y or increase the tripping level of the thermal overload relay Nuisance Tripping Because of High Drive Carrier Frequency High carrier frequency PWM drives make current waveforms that can increase the temperature in overload relays It may be necessary to increase the trip level setting when encountering nuisance triggering of the relay WARNING Fire Hazard Before you increase the detection level of ...

Page 128: ...n you connect a thyristor converter for example a DC drive to the same power supply system use an AC reactor The main circuit terminal block for the drive and the terminal blocks for the AC and DC reactors come in different shapes Correctly prepare the ends of the wiring Ground the AC and DC reactors option on the back of the mounting base Remove all paint from the mounting surface of the control ...

Page 129: ... Protective Device A surge protective device decreases the surge voltage generated when you switch an inductive load near the drive Inductive loads include Magnetic contactors Electromagnetic relays Magnetic valves Solenoids Magnetic brakes Always use a surge protective device or diode with inductive loads Note Do not connect a surge protective device to the drive output side ...

Page 130: ...the drive decreases inductive noise and radio frequency interference Figure 2 147 shows an example of noise filter wiring NOTICE Do not connect phase advancing capacitors LC RC noise filters or leakage breakers RCM RCD to the motor circuit If you connect these devices to the output circuits it can cause damage to the drive and connected equipment A Power supply B Drive C Noise filter on output sid...

Page 131: ...ctive Noise Decrease Radio Frequency Interference The drive input lines and output lines generate radio frequency interference Use noise filters on input and output sides and install the drive in a steel box to decrease radio frequency interference Note Keep the cable between the drive and motor as short as possible A Steel box B Power supply C Noise filter D Drive E Noise filter F Shielded motor ...

Page 132: ...ust provide branch circuit protection as specified by the National Electric NEC the Canadian Electric Code Part I CEC and local codes Table 2 27 Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection 200 V Class Drive Model The maximum applicable motor output kW HP Input Current Rating A Semiconductor Protection Fuse Rated Current Manufacturer EATON Bussmann 2003 0 55 0 5 3 6 FWH 45B 2005 0 75 1 4 8 FWH 45...

Page 133: ...B 4024 11 15 30 6 FWH 150B 4031 15 20 41 3 FWH 200B 4039 18 5 25 50 5 FWH 200B 4045 22 30 43 1 FWH 225A 4060 30 40 58 3 FWH 250A 4075 37 50 71 5 FWH 275A 4091 45 60 86 5 FWH 275A 4112 55 75 105 FWH 300A 4150 75 100 142 FWH 325A FWH 400A 1 4180 90 125 170 FWH 500A 4216 110 150 207 FWH 600A 4260 132 175 248 FWH 700A 4304 2 160 200 300 FWH 800A 4371 2 200 250 373 FWH 1000B 4414 2 220 300 410 FWH 1200...

Page 134: ... current A 10 3 If the cable between the drive and motor exceeds 50 m lower the carrier frequency using C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 6 Properly ground the drive 7 Tighten main circuit and grounding terminal screws of the drive to their specified torques 8 Set up overload protection circuits when running multiple motors from a single drive A Power Supply B Drive Series C oL1 oLn thermal overlo...

Page 135: ... or vector duty motor with reinforced insulation and windings applicable for use with an AC drive If the motor does not have the correct insulation it can cause a short circuit or ground fault from insulation deterioration High Speed Operation If you operate a motor more than its rated speed you can have problems with the motor bearing durability and dynamic balance of the machine Contact the moto...

Page 136: ...ffers depending on the lubricating method and the manufacturer In particular in the case of oil lubrication continuous operation in the low speed range may cause burnout Consult with the manufacturer for the applications that require frequencies in excess of the rated frequency Single Phase Motors Variable speed drives are not designed to operate with single phase motors Using capacitors to start ...

Page 137: ... 3 4 Keypad Operation 147 3 5 Items to Check before Starting Up the Drive 180 3 6 Application Preset 183 3 7 Test Run Procedure 185 3 8 Auto Tuning 188 3 9 No load Test Runs 193 3 10 Crane Application Setup Procedure 194 3 11 Problems that Can Frequently Occur during Setup and Possible Solutions 226 3 12 Controllability Problems and Possible Solutions 238 3 13 Test Run Checklist 242 ...

Page 138: ... covers and shields before you operate the drive Use the drive only as specified by the instructions Some figures in this section include drives without covers or safety shields to more clearly show the inside of the drive If covers or safety shields are missing from the drive it can cause serious injury or death Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized If you touc...

Page 139: ...gard Existing RUN Command B ALM LED Illuminates when the drive detects a fault Flashes when the drive detects Alarm An oPE parameter setting error A fault or alarm during Auto Tuning The light switches off when the drive is in normal operation There is no fault or alarm C microSD Card Insertion Slot The insertion point for a microSD card D Function Keys F1 F2 F3 The menu shown on the keypad sets t...

Page 140: ...USB standard 2 0 type A mini B to connect the keypad to a PC K RJ 45 Connector Connects to the drive using an RJ 45 8 pin straight through UTP CAT5e extension cable or keypad connector L Clock Battery Cover Remove it when installing replacing the clock battery Note Refer to Replace the Keypad s Battery for details on the type of battery required and the installation procedure The clock battery is ...

Page 141: ...AL Mode The drive received a Run command from an external source and the drive is not in Drive Ready READY condition The drive received a Fast Stop command The safety function shut off the drive output You pushed on the keypad while the drive is operating in REMOTE Mode The drive is energized with an active Run command and b1 17 0 Run Command at Power Up Disregard Existing RUN Command When b1 03 3...

Page 142: ...3 2 Component Names and Functions 142 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual Figure 3 4 Relation between RUN indicator and Drive Operation ...

Page 143: ...tup Procedure and Test Run 3 3 2 Component Names and Functions YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual 143 Keypad Mode and Menu Displays Figure 3 5 Keypad Functions and Display Levels ...

Page 144: ...quency Reference in LOCAL Mode The keypad will show Rdy when the drive is in Drive Mode The drive is prepared to accept a Run command Table 3 3 Drive Mode Screens and Functions Mode Keypad Screen Function Drive Mode Monitors Sets monitor items to display Programming Mode Parameters Changes parameter settings User Custom Parameters Shows the User Parameters Parameter Backup Restore Saves parameters...

Page 145: ... the drive cannot operate such as when in Programming Mode or when is flashing C RUN Illuminated The drive is in regular operation Flashing 1 The drive is decelerating to stop The drive received a Run command but the frequency reference is 0 Hz The drive received a DC Injection Braking command Flashing Quickly 1 The drive received a Run command from the MFDI terminals and is switching to REMOTE Mo...

Page 146: ...3 3 LED Status Ring 146 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual Figure 3 7 Relation between RUN LED and Drive Operation ...

Page 147: ...ce The motor will rotate while JOG is pushed Cease from pushing the key and the motor stops Change Motor between Forward Reverse Run You can use the keypad to switch the direction of motor rotation between forward and reverse by setting b1 02 0 Run Command Selection 1 Keypad Push FWD REV to toggle the direction of motor rotation between forward and reverse Show the Standard Monitor Push to show th...

Page 148: ... HOME screen Show the Monitor This section shows how to show the standard monitors Ux xx 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note When the drive is in HOME Mode the screen shows Home in the upper right hand corner of the screen If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Monitors then push 4 Push or to select Standard Monitor then push 5 Push or to select moni...

Page 149: ...1 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If the keypad does not show Home on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Monitors then push 4 Push or to select Custom Monitor then push Setup 5 Push or to select Custom Monitor 1 then push 6 Push or to select the monitor number to register then push Set ...

Page 150: ...me on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Monitors then push 4 Push or to select Custom Monitor then push The keypad shows the selected monitor as shown in this figure When there are a minimum of two screens push or to switch between screens If you registered only one custom monitor to Custom Monitor 1 the screen will show only one monitor If you registered custom monitors only to Custom Monitor 1 and...

Page 151: ...me is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Monitors then push 4 Push or to select Bar Graph then push Setup 5 Push or to select the location to store the monitor then push 6 Push 7 Push or to select the monitor number to register then push Monitor Set the x xx part of the Ux xx For example to show monitor U1 01 Frequency Reference set it to 101 as shown in this fi...

Page 152: ...een is active If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Monitors then push 4 Push or to select Display Bar Graph then push The screen will show the monitors as shown in this figure Set the Monitors to Show as Analog Gauges The procedure in this section shows how to show the frequency reference monitor as an analog gauge 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen No...

Page 153: ...Monitor Set the x xx part of the Ux xx For example to show monitor U1 01 Frequency Reference set it to 101 as shown in this figure The configuration procedure is complete Display Monitors as an Analog Gauge The following explains how to display the contents selected for a monitor as an analog gauge 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will Home in the top right corner when the HOME ...

Page 154: ...nitor Parameter 1 set with Custom Monitor 1 B Monitor Parameter 2 set with Custom Monitor 2 C Trend Plot 2 Scale Maximum Minimum Value D Trend Plot Time Scale E Trend Plot 1 Scale Maximum Minimum Value Select Monitor Items to Show as a Trend Plot The procedure in this section shows how to show the frequency reference monitor as a trend plot 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will ...

Page 155: ...then push Setup 5 Push or to select Custom Monitor 1 then push 6 Push 7 Push or to select the monitor number to register then push When the U parameters are on the display as Ux xx the three digits in x xx identify which monitor to output For example to show monitor U1 01 Frequency Reference set it to 101 as shown in this figure 8 Push or to select Trend Plot 1 Scale Minimum Value then push ...

Page 156: ... select the specified digit then push or to select the correct number Push Default to set the parameters to factory defaults Push Min Max to move between the minimum value and maximum value 13 Push to keep the changes 14 Push Back If necessary use the same procedure to set Custom Monitor 2 Set the Time Scale for the Trend Plot Monitor The procedure in this section shows how to set the time scale f...

Page 157: ...t Trend Plot Time Scale Setting then push 6 Push or to select the specified digit then push or to select the correct number Push Default to set the parameters to the factory default Push Min Max to move between the minimum value and maximum value 7 Push to keep the changes The configuration procedure is complete Show Monitor Items as a Trend Plot The procedure in this section shows how to show the...

Page 158: ...en will show the monitors as shown in this figure Note Push Hold to switch between Pause and Restart for the monitor display The Hold ENTER message flashes while you pause monitoring Change Parameter Setting Values This example shows how to change the setting value for C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 Do the steps in this procedure to set parameters for the application 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen...

Page 159: ...ccel Decel Time then push 6 Push or to select C1 01 then push 7 Push or to select the specified digit then push or to select the correct number Push Default to set the parameter to factory default Push Min Max to show the minimum value or the maximum value on the display 8 Push to keep the changes 9 Continue to change parameters then push Back Home to go back to the home screen after you change al...

Page 160: ...of the list The A2 01 to A2 32 settings change when the A1 06 setting changes which makes it easier to set and reference the necessary parameter settings 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note When the drive is in HOME Mode the screen shows Home in the upper right hand corner of the screen If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select User Custom Parameters th...

Page 161: ...ave time when setting parameters after replacing a drive If you set up more than one drive you can copy the parameter settings from a drive that completed a test run to the other drives Note Always stop the motor before making a backup of the parameters While making a backup the drive will not accept Run commands 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right c...

Page 162: ... to another drive Note Always stop the drive before starting the restoration procedure for parameter backups The drive rejects a Run command while restoring parameters 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Parameter Backup Restore then push...

Page 163: ...a is not registered D Backup data does not contain the date Information E Backup date Verify Keypad Parameters and Drive Parameters This procedure verifies that the parameter setting values that were backed up in the keypad agree with the parameter setting values in the drive Note Always stop the drive before you start to verify the parameters The drive does not accept Run commands while verifying...

Page 164: ...rive Note The keypad shows vFyE Parameters do not Match when the parameter settings backed up in the keypad do not agree with the parameter settings copied to the drive Push one of the keys to return to the screen in Step 6 Erase Parameters Backed Up to the Keypad This procedure deletes parameters that were backed up to the keypad 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home ...

Page 165: ...te Check Modified Parameters This procedure will show all parameters that are not at their default values This is very useful when you replace a drive This lets you quickly access and re edit changed parameters When all parameters are at their default values the keypad will show 0 Parameters 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note When the drive is in HOME Mode the screen shows Home in the upper ...

Page 166: ...parameter to examine 7 To re edit a parameter push or select the parameter to edit then push 8 Push or to select the digit then push or to change the value 9 When you are done changing the value push The parameter revision procedure is complete Restore Modified Parameters to Defaults This procedure will set all parameters with changed values to their default settings ...

Page 167: ...n Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Modified Param Fault Log then push 4 Push or to select Modified Parameters then push 5 Push 6 Push or to select the parameters to return to their default settings then push 7 Push Default ...

Page 168: ...y you must set the date and time each time you energize the drive 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Modified Param Fault Log then push 4 Push or to select Fault Log then push 5 Push or to show the fault history you will examine Au...

Page 169: ...to Tuning is complete If you touch a motor that is energized it can cause serious injury or death WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard Before you do Rotational Auto Tuning disconnect the load from the motor The load can move suddenly and cause serious injury or death This procedure shows how to do Rotational Auto Tuning 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right ...

Page 170: ...parameters as the result of Auto Tuning 10 Push or in the parameter change confirmation screen to check the changed parameters then select Auto Tuning Successful at the bottom of the screen and push To change a parameter again push or to select the parameter to change then push to show the parameter setting screen Auto Tuning is complete Note If the drive detects an error or you push before Auto T...

Page 171: ...language then push The procedure to set the keypad language is complete Set the Date and Time The procedure in this section shows how to set the date and time Note Refer to Replace the Keypad Battery on page 419 for information about the battery installation procedure To set the drive to detect an alarm when the battery is dead or when the clock is not set install the battery then set o4 24 1 bAT ...

Page 172: ...or to select Initial Setup then push 4 Push or to select Set Date Time and push 5 Push or to select the format of date display then push 6 Push or to select the format of time display then push 7 Push or to select the Year Month Day then push or to change the value 8 When you are done changing the value push ...

Page 173: ... and time is complete Disable the Initial Setup Screen Do the steps in this procedure to not show the initial start up screen when the drive is energized 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note When the drive is in HOME Mode the screen shows Home in the upper right hand corner of the screen If the screen does not show Home for push Back and then push to show Home 2 Push Menu 3 Push to select Init...

Page 174: ...n this section shows how to start logging data You can record a maximum of 10 monitors 1 Make sure that a microSD card is inserted in the keypad 2 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note When the drive is in HOME Mode the screen shows Home in the upper right hand corner of the screen If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 3 Push Menu 4 Push or to select Diagnostic Tools then push 5 Push ...

Page 175: ... to log data 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note When the drive is in HOME Mode the screen shows Home in the upper right hand corner of the screen If the screen does not show Home for push Back and then push to show Home 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Diagnostic Tools then push 4 Push or to select Data Logger then push Setup 5 Push or to select Log Monitor then push 6 Push or to select the s...

Page 176: ...sampling time for data logging 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note When the drive is in HOME Mode the screen shows Home in the upper right hand corner of the screen If the screen does not show Home for push Back and then push to show Home 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Diagnostic Tools then push 4 Push or to select Data Logger then push Setup 5 Push or to select Log Sampling Interval then pu...

Page 177: ...fter a set length of time since the last key operation on the keypad The procedure in this section shows how to turn ON and turn OFF the backlight 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not shown on push Back to show Home on 2 Push Menu 3 Push or to select Diagnostic Tools then push 4 Push or to select Ba...

Page 178: ...t the backlight to turn OFF automatically is complete Show Information about the Drive The procedure in this section shows how to show the drive model maximum applicable motor output rated output current software version and serial number on the keypad 1 Push Home to show the HOME screen Note The keypad will show Home in the top right corner when the HOME screen is active If Home is not shown on p...

Page 179: ...ly back up parameters to the keypad connected to the drive and write those parameters to a drive from the same drive series as specified by the settings of o3 06 Auto Parameter Backup Selection and o3 07 Auto Parameter Backup Interval Note Set o3 06 1 Auto Parameter Backup Selection Enabled in each drive to which you will write the parameters This operation is not available when the parameters in ...

Page 180: ...OFF the inputs from all devices and switches connected to the drive control circuit terminals Connection between Machinery and Motor Disengage all couplings and belts that connect the motor and machinery Check after You Energize the Drive Check the items in Table 3 5 after you energize the drive The keypad display is different depending on drive status Table 3 5 Display Status after You Energize t...

Page 181: ...G B3 or PG X3 Open Loop Vector control 2 Not required Closed Loop Vector control 3 PG B3 or PG X3 Advanced Open Loop Vector control 4 Not required Refer to Control Method Type and Corresponding Features on page 26 for more information about the features of each control method Parameter Settings for Operation Without the Brake Sequence If you operate the drive without the brake sequence set S1 54 0...

Page 182: ...ith the A phase or the B phase when the Forward run command is input 2 If the output signal leads with the A phase the A pulse leads at 90 from the B phase when the motor rotates forward then set F1 05 0 Encoder 1 Rotation Selection Pulse A leads in FWD Direction 3 If the output signal leads with the B phase the B pulse leads at 90 from the A phase when the motor rotates forward then set F1 05 1 P...

Page 183: ...ameters will cause a problem do not change the settings Table 3 7 A1 06 Setting Values and Best Parameter Settings No Name Application Preset A1 06 Setting Crane Hoist 1 Crane Traveling 2 Closed Loop Crane Hoist 3 A1 02 Control Method Selection 2 Open Loop Vector 0 V f Control 3 Closed Loop Vector Control b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 0 Keypad 0 Keypad 0 Keypad C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 3 ...

Page 184: ... 0 0 Hz 3 0 Hz S1 14 Slip Prevention Frequency 3 0 Hz 0 0 Hz 0 0 Hz S1 15 Slip Prevention Time 0 30 s 0 00 s 0 00 s S1 16 Sequence Fault SE1 Detect Time 0 30 s 0 00 s 0 30 s S1 17 Sequence Fault SE2 Detect Time 1 00 s 0 00 s 1 00 s S1 18 Sequence Fault SE3 Detect Time 0 50 s 0 00 s 0 50 s S1 19 Sequence Fault SE4 Detect Time 0 50 s 0 00 s 0 50 s S1 54 Brake Sequence Selection 1 Enabled 0 Disabled ...

Page 185: ...tant speed Take the following corrective action if the output current exceeds the motor rated current Decouple the motor and machinery and perform Auto Tuning with just the motor connected Note If Auto Tuning has already been performed then it does not need to be done again Make sure that the holding brake is released before performing Rotational Auto Tuning Rotational Auto Tuning can not be perfo...

Page 186: ... information 2 Refer to Brake Sequence Checks on page 186 for details If the adjustment result has a problem readjust S1 xx Brake Sequence Figure 3 9 Test Run Procedure Brake Sequence Checks Perform the following checks when adjusting brake sequences No slipping during startup or stops No excessive startup current during startup or stops Use the following method to quickly determine if there is ex...

Page 187: ...kHold Output Freq Low speed startup is not negatively affected by a output frequency hanging Sub Chart Induction Motor Auto Tuning and Test Run Procedure Figure 3 10 Induction Motor Auto Tuning and Test Run Procedure 1 Before performing Rotational Auto Tuning check that the holding brake is released 2 Before performing Inertia Tuning check to make sure that the holding brake is released 3 Before p...

Page 188: ...hen using motors requiring high precision control Rotational Auto Tuning gives the most accurate results and is recommended if possible When motor and load cannot be decoupled but the motor load is below 30 x x x Stationary Auto Tuning T1 01 1 When motor and load cannot be decoupled and the motor load is greater than 30 When information from the motor test report or nameplate is not available With...

Page 189: ...hen performing ASR and Inertia Tuning for the control system H1 xx 16 Motor 2 Selection cannot be used Do not perform ASR and Inertia Tuning for applications that switch between motor 1 and motor 3 Table 3 10 ASR and Inertia Tuning Selection Mode T3 00 Application Conditions and Benefits Applicable Control Method A1 02 Setting V f 0 CL V f 1 OLV 2 CLV 3 AOLV 4 Inertia Tuning 0 To perform Feed Forw...

Page 190: ...tio x x L3 24 Motor Accel Time Rated Torque x x L3 25 Load Inertia Ratio x x n5 02 Motor Inertia Acceleration Time x x n5 03 Feed Forward Control Gain x x 1 The drive automatically sets C1 08 Deceleration Time 4 only when C1 11 Accel Decel Time Switchover Freq 0 Precautions before Auto Tuning Examine the topics in this section before you start Auto Tuning Prepare for Basic Auto Tuning You must inp...

Page 191: ...ameters if the load is connected to the motor while doing Rotational Auto Tuning and the drive will not operate the motor correctly When the load is 30 or less of the motor duty rating you can do Auto Tuning with the motor connected to a load If you do Rotational Auto Tuning while connected to a load that is more than 30 the drive will not correctly calculate the motor parameters and it can be dan...

Page 192: ... Tuning is complete If you touch a motor that is energized it can cause serious injury or death Precautions before Inertia Tuning and ASR Tuning Before Inertia Tuning or ASR Tuning check these items WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard During Auto Tuning the motor will receive high voltage when the motor is stopped Do not touch the motor until Auto Tuning is complete If you touch a motor that is energi...

Page 193: ... Run This section explains how to perform a no load test run 1 Set b1 01 0 Frequency Reference Selection 1 Keypad or b1 02 0 Run Command Selection 1 Keypad will illuminate when the keypad is the Run command source 2 Push Home to show the HOME screen If Home is not on push Back to show Home on 3 Push to show d1 01 Reference 1 and set it to 6 00 Hz 4 Push LED illuminates and the motor runs at 6 00 H...

Page 194: ...t to start hoisting or lowering A speed reference signal set with MFDI is input The Safe Disable signal is input from an external source to terminal H1 HC and H2 HC this is separate from a baseblock situation The Software baseblock command signal is not input from any of the MFDI terminals this is separate from a baseblock situation The conditions must be met to output a Brake release command Outp...

Page 195: ...input option card to enter the speed reference Input Signal Setup Multi Funciton Digital Inputs Terminals S1 to S10 Use the H1 Parameters to set functions to the MFDI terminals S1 to S10 For more information about MFDI functions refer to H1 xx MFDI Setting Values on page 500 Multi Function Digital Outputs Use the H2 Parameters to set functions to the MFDO terminals M1 M6 MA MB MC P1 C1 P2 C2 Refer...

Page 196: ...e Current REV S1 07 1 Brake Release Torque FWD For hoisting set S1 07 100 S1 08 0 For traveling set 50 If the load differs when operating forwards and in reverse then change the setting appropriately to match the load Note If there is fair amount of lurching out set 70 80 for hoisting the load If the setting value is too low then load slips will likely occur at start If the setting value is too hi...

Page 197: ...tion Refer to Adjusting the Run Command on page 204 for details Forward Run Command Reverse Run Command Operation Ref OFF OFF Ramps to stop according to the stop sequence 200 ON OFF The motor rotates in the forward direction OFF ON The motor rotates in the reverse direction ON ON The keypad shows SE1 Brake Sequence Fault 1 SE1 and the motor will coast to stop The Brake release command is switched ...

Page 198: ...d S1 04 is 0 for Closed Loop Vector Control Note the following precautions regarding the use of torque compensation Torque compensation is used to perform the following operations with hoisting cranes that lack counterweights Set S1 01 and S1 02 to 0 to use torque compensation Release brakes when the output frequency is low shockless operation Release brakes as quickly as possible shorten operatio...

Page 199: ...ompensation REV S1 11 Torque Compensation Delay Time S1 12 Brake Hold Frequency FWD S1 13 Brake Hold Frequency REV S1 14 Slip Prevention Frequency S1 15 Slip Prevention Time b2 01 DC Injection Zero SpeedThreshold E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency Note Note the following precautions regarding the use of torque forcing Torque forcing is used to perform the following operations The operation is selected...

Page 200: ...f torque forcing is input that corresponds to the setting value Note In Open Loop Vector the drive uses torque forcing instead of torque compensation 2 After verifying that all of the following conditions have been satisfied the drive switches ON the Brake Release command BR Once the Brake Release command is ON the Brake Release Check BX switches ON through an external sequence Output frequency af...

Page 201: ...rake If a Run command is entered that is in the opposite direction that the motor is currently rotating in then once the stop sequence has been carried out and the brake has fully closed the drive will carry out the start sequence and operate in the opposite direction Note Refer to Stop Sequence on page 200 for more information about the stop sequence Refer to Sequence at Startup on page 200 for m...

Page 202: ...n the Speed Reference Input S1 01 Brake Release Frequency FWD S1 02 Brake Release Frequency REV S1 03 Brake Delay Frequency S1 04 Brake Delay Time S1 12 Brake Hold Frequency FWD S1 13 Brake Hold Frequency REV S1 14 Slip Prevention Frequency S1 15 Slip Prevention Time b2 01 DC Injection Zero SpeedThreshold E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency ...

Page 203: ...rence input from terminal A1 is lower than b2 01 DC Injection Zero SpeedThreshold and E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency for more than 100 ms then the drive will determine that the Run command has been switched OFF Description of Operation 1 With terminal S1 switched ON if a signal is input to terminal A1 with a level absolute value greater than b2 01 and E1 09 then the drive will determine that a Run...

Page 204: ... setting values appropriately for the load Brake grinding occurs and it does not reach the brake release torque Examine the brake torque SE3 Brake Sequence Fault 3 SE3 Sequence Error of the Brake Circuit Examine the sequence circuit of brake release check signal BX S1 18 The response scan of the Sequence circuit is slow Loose connection or disconnection of the relay electromagnetic contactor and b...

Page 205: ...pposite to the output frequency Conditions for Run Command Control Method S2 01 0 S2 02 0 S2 01 0 S2 02 0 Output Frequency fα 1 Output Frequency fα 1 Output Frequency fα 1 Output Frequency fα 1 Drive operation Closed Loop Vector Control Switches between Forward Reverse run without engaging the brake 2 Closes the brake and briefly stops Stops for at least 50 ms Other than CLV control Closes the bra...

Page 206: ...ction should not be used Even when the transport cart bumps into something the motor output axle does not lock up so because the torque reference or the output current does not rise Impact Stop is not activated Related Parameters Table 3 15 Parameters for Impact Stop No Name Description S3 01 Impact Stop Creep Frequency Set this value higher than S1 14 Slip Prevention Frequency S3 02 Impact Stop C...

Page 207: ...eed set in S3 01 Consequently once the output frequency reference reaches the value set in S1 01 Brake Release Frequency FWD in reverse S1 02 Brake Release Frequency REV then the terminal set to H2 xx 21 Brake Release Command will shut OFF from an external circuit Once the Brake release command BR turns OFF then the terminal set to H1 xx 0 Brake Release Check turns OFF from an external circuit 3 I...

Page 208: ...3 Light load 1 Max Freq REV S4 04 Light load 1 Detect Torque FWD Usually set S4 04 50 and S4 05 50 The setting is determined by the motor specifications S4 05 Light load 1 Detect Torque REV S4 06 Light load 1 Detect Frequency Usually set S4 06 E1 06 Base Frequency S4 07 Light load 1 Detect Time Usually set S4 07 1 s If setting is too short then the drive may not be able to accurately detect the lo...

Page 209: ... set in S4 06 Afterwards the drive will not re accelerate Light load Acceleration no matter how low the torque reference is Light load Acceleration is reset under the following conditions After resetting Light load Acceleration the drive will not accelerate until performing the load check described above When the Run command is switched OFF When the frequency reference S4 06 When a fault occurs Wh...

Page 210: ...reference or the value set in S4 02 S4 03 whichever is smaller Light load Acceleration 2 Function Light load Acceleration 2 has the drive automatically determine if it should accelerate up to the frequency reference input to the drive If the motor acceleration time is too short and if there is not enough headroom in the motor rated output for what is needed to accelerate within the designated acce...

Page 211: ...ange the rated output range with S4 17 to ensure the load detection in regeneration operation Also set S4 11 0 to 50 S4 12 L L 2 Regen Hold Level Sets the level at which the drive stops accelerating to hold acceleration as a percentage of the motor rated output for when the motor output power is not kept within the high speed range the rated output range while working with a regenerative load Usua...

Page 212: ... load Accel 2 Enabled ON Enabled OFF Disabled Table 3 19 Requirement for Enabling Light load Acceleration MFDI Function Settings S4 01 Setting Light load Accel 2 Enable Disable H1 xx 36 Digital Inputs OFF Unrelated to settings The output frequency will not exceed S4 08 ON Light load Acceleration 2 is enabled H1 xx 36 1 Light load Accel Ctrl 1 enabled Light load Acceleration 1 is enabled 2 Light lo...

Page 213: ...if the output power is equal to or greater than the fault level set in S4 15 for the time set in S4 16 or longer After the fault detection the drive follows the protective operation set in S4 14 S4 14 Setting Operation after Detection Mode 0 Ramp to stop Fault triggers a fault relay output 1 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop 3 Acceleration prohibited Minor fault 2 4 Frequency deceleration Decreases...

Page 214: ... operation depending on how high the drive torque reference or the output current is in order to provide mechanical protection to the crane If the drive detects an overtorque situation then it displays oL3 Overtorque Detection 1 or oL4 Overtorque Detection 2 on the keypad You can set 2 levels for overtorque detection and 2 types of action to take after detecting overtorque Note The overtorque dete...

Page 215: ...cleared from the keypad display 17 Torque Detection 1 N C If the drive detects overtorque based on the conditions set for Overtorque Detection 1 then this digital output will switch OFF The digital output will switch ON when oL3 is cleared from the keypad display 18 Torque Detection 2 N O If the drive detects overtorque based on the conditions set for Overtorque Detection 2 then this digital outpu...

Page 216: ... does not change even if the terminal switched ON during forward run Motor Switch Function The drive operates by switching between 3 motors using an external input Motor 1 and motor 2 can be used for hoisting raising lowering and traverse applications Motor 3 can be used for traveling and slewing applications The drive saves the control methods V f patterns and motor parameters for each of the 3 m...

Page 217: ...ip Compensation Delay Time C3 02 C3 22 Default setting for V f Control Slip Compensation Limit C3 03 C3 23 Default setting for V f Control Slip Compensation at Regen C3 04 C3 24 Default setting for V f Control Torque Compensation Torque Compensation Gain C4 01 C4 07 Default setting for V f Control Torque Compensation Delay Time C4 02 C4 08 Default setting for V f Control Torque Comp Delay Time Sel...

Page 218: ...req Volt Select E1 18 E3 14 E7 08 Minimum Out Freq Volt Select E1 19 E3 15 E7 10 Motor Parameters Motor Rated Current FLA E2 01 E4 01 E7 21 Motor Rated Slip E2 02 E4 02 Default setting for V f Control Motor No Load Current E2 03 E4 03 Default setting for V f Control Motor Pole Count E2 04 E4 04 E7 24 Motor Line to Line Resistance E2 05 E4 05 E7 25 Motor Leakage Inductance E2 06 E4 06 Default setti...

Page 219: ... is applied to motor 1 and motor 2 only For motor 3 set up a thermal overload relay between the drive and motor 3 so that the sequence trips an external fault coast to stop You cannot switch between V f patterns during run for motor 3 Even when b1 23 1 Selection REV Parameters Enabled the drive will not switch between motors even when the counterweight signal is input If the frequency reference ex...

Page 220: ... Run command forward or reverse along with the parameter setting combinations Set the following parameters when using this function Set b1 23 1 Selection REV Parameters Enabled Set H1 xx 38 MFDI Function Selection Counterweight Selection Note The switching function is disabled during run Related Parameters Table 3 25 Related Parameters No Name b1 23 Selection REV Parameters C4 02 Torque Compensati...

Page 221: ...ype selected with S2 08 is applicable to all three motors motor 1 motor 2 and motor 3 Note If a particular motor does not have a brake sequence enabled the Run command will be counted even when S2 08 1 Brake Release Command count Applicable motor Motor 1 Motor 2 Motor 3 Count type Select the command to be counted with S2 08 0 Run Command count 1 Brake Release Command count Cumulative Startup Count...

Page 222: ...set value value S2 11 1 2 Motor3 Number of Driving start Sets the motor 3 startup count in increments of 10 000 repetitions Starts counting from the set value value S2 12 MentenanceTimer Output Selection Sets the method of alarm output 0 Disable 1 Alarm 2 Fault S2 13 3 Motor1 Number of Driving Limit Sets the startup count 1 fault minor fault output level in increments of 10 000 repetitions CnT1 is...

Page 223: ... lower 4 digits of the cumulative motor 3 startup count Note The drive run count appears as an 8 digit number U4 58 displays the upper 4 digits and U4 57 displays the lower 4 digits The maximum count value is 10 000 000 The counter stops once the maximum value is reached The count value can be changed with S2 11 U4 58 Num of Driv 3 High Displays the upper 4 digits of the cumulative motor 3 startup...

Page 224: ...e frequency reference is multiplied by the gain set to S2 17 Micro Speed Gain2 Note When the frequency reduction gain 1 input is on the gain set to S2 16 Micro Speed Gain1 has priority Description of Operation Rapid Deceleration Function The deceleration rate can be changed to rapidly stop operation by inputting a Run command in reverse to the current running direction during the ramp to stop oper...

Page 225: ...The emergency stop command has been received from MFDI The setting range of acceleration deceleration time is determined by the setting of C1 10 Accel Decel Time Setting Units When C1 10 0 units of 0 01 seconds the setting range of the acceleration deceleration time is between 0 00 and 600 00 seconds Related Parameters No Name Adjustment Method S2 18 Rapid Deceleration Selection Enables and disabl...

Page 226: ...s Not Restart after Power Loss 228 Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Run Command 229 Motor Rotates in One Direction Only 229 Motor Stops When Operating at the Brake Release Frequency Speed 229 Response Is Slow at Start 229 Motor Stalls during Acceleration or Accel Decel Time Is Too Long 229 Output Frequency Is Not As High As Frequency Reference 230 Drive Frequency Reference Differs ...

Page 227: ...Stop the drive and switch over to Programming Mode A1 01 0 Access Level Selection Operation Only is set Set A1 01 2 Access Level Selection Advanced Level or A1 01 3 Expert Level H1 xx 1B MFDI Function Selection Programming Lockout is set Turn ON the terminals to which H1 xx 1B is set and then change the parameters Note You cannot change parameters when terminals to which H1 xx 1B is set are turned...

Page 228: ...nals SC SP using a wire jumper For sourcing mode short circuit terminals SC SN using a wire jumper In the case of an external power supply remove the wire jumper The frequency reference is too low Check U1 01 Frequency Reference Make the frequency reference higher than E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency The MFAI setting is incorrect Check if the functions set to the analog input terminals being used a...

Page 229: ...Operating at the Brake Release Frequency Speed Causes Possible Solutions Too much motor slip The settings of S1 01 Brake Release Frequency FWD and S1 02 Break Release Frequency REV are incorrect Increase the setting value of S1 01 and S1 02 Response Is Slow at Start Causes Possible Solutions The torque compensation setting is not correct while using Open Loop Vector Control Closed Loop Vector Cont...

Page 230: ...ontrol Method Selection Advanced Open Loop Vector Increase the value set in n4 65 Flux Estimate Response High Freq in increments of 0 1 The Stall Prevention level during acceleration set too low Increase the value set in L3 02 Stall Prevent Level during Accel Note If L3 02 is set too low acceleration may be taking too long The Stall Prevention level during run has been set too low Increase the val...

Page 231: ...0 Disabled If the drive detects ov Overvoltage set L3 04 3 General Purpose w DB resistor The deceleration time setting is too long Set C1 02 C1 04 C1 06 or C1 08 Deceleration Times to applicable values The motor torque is not sufficient Use a larger motor Note If these items are correct the demand on the motor is more than the motor capacity Parameter settings are correct The drive does not detect...

Page 232: ... s Increase the setting value of E1 08 Mid Point A Voltage to around 20 V maximum 40 V for 400 V class drive Note Refer to Magnetic Flux Compensation Start up Current Suppression on page 236 to solve problems in flux build up Load Slips at Stop Causes Possible Solutions The setting value of S1 05 Brake Release Current FWD is too low while using V f control or OLV control Increase the setting value...

Page 233: ...p E4 02 Motor 2 Rated Slip for motor 2 to a value of 60 to 80 of the test report value Too Much Output Current Oscillation Causes Possible Solutions Gain parameters do not agree with motor parameters while using Open Loop Vector Control Make sure that motor parameters E2 xx are not too different than the value in the test report Do the Auto Tuning process if it is not done Increase the setting val...

Page 234: ... Impact Stop Detect Torque REV are too high Decrease the setting value of S3 03 and S3 04 Torque does not increase when the transport cart impacts something Check the slip of the cart wheels and if something causing mechanical friction The value set in S3 02 Impact Stop Creep Time is too high Decrease the setting value of S3 02 Accelerates Despite a Heavy Load When Using the Light Load Acceleratio...

Page 235: ... disabled Set n1 01 1 Hunting Prevention Selection Enabled Normal Increase the value of n2 01 Automatic Freq Regulator Gain F or n2 02 Automatic Freq Regulator Time 1 Oscillation Occurs When Lowering in a Hoist Lowering Crane Without a Counterweight Causes Possible Solutions The setting value of S1 20 Operation in Reverse is not correct Set S1 20 1 Regen operation in reverse Oscillation Occurs Whe...

Page 236: ...Selection 2 0 kHz Note When the motor is connected to the drive output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 surges occur between the drive switching and the motor coils These surges can be three times the drive input power supply voltage 600 V for a 200 V class drive 1200 V for a 400 V class drive The air around the motor is too hot Measure the ambient temperature Decrease the temperature in the area unti...

Page 237: ...ly DC Inject Braking at Start All control methods It is possible to start operating after a bit of flux has built up However it can take over 1 s for flux to build up in mid sized motors Some adjustment is necessary because waiting for over 1 s will decrease the responsiveness of the drive Note Usually set between 0 2 s and 0 3 s Magnetic Flux Compensation OLV Control The purpose of this function ...

Page 238: ...d response Hunting or oscillation C4 02 Torque Compensation Delay Time If torque or speed response are slow decrease the setting value If hunting or oscillation occur increase the setting value 200 ms 2 100 ms to 1000 ms Torque at low speeds 10 Hz or lower is not sufficient Hunting or oscillation C4 01 Torque Compensation Gain Increase the setting value when torque is insufficient at low speeds If...

Page 239: ...alue in 50 ms increments and examine the response If the response is not sufficient decrease the setting value in 10 ms increments and examine the response Note Make sure that this parameter setting is n2 02 Automatic Freq Regulator Time 1 n2 03 When you adjust n2 03 you must also increase the C4 06 Motor 2 Torque Comp Delay Time value by the same ratio 750 ms 750 ms to 2000 ms C4 06 Motor 2 Torqu...

Page 240: ...ng oscillation High speed C5 01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 Low speed C5 03 ASR Proportional Gain 2 1 Increase setting value in increments of 5 00 when torque speed response is slow If hunting oscillation occurs decrease the setting value 20 00 10 00 50 00 High speed C5 02 ASR Integral Time 1 Low speed C5 04 ASR Integral Time 2 1 Decrease setting value when torque speed response is slow If hunting osc...

Page 241: ...gh speed C5 02 ASR Integral Time 1 Low speed C5 04 ASR Integral Time 2 3 Decrease setting value when torque speed response is slow If hunting oscillation occurs increase the setting value 0 500 s 0 300 s to 1 000 s Speed response cannot be secured for low speed or high speed C5 07 ASR Gain Switchover Frequency 4 High speed C5 01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 C5 02 ASR Integral Time 1 Low speed C5 03 ASR...

Page 242: ...ines when you do Rotational Auto Tuning 10 Refer to the information on the motor nameplate and set this data correctly Motor rated power kW to T1 02 Motor rated voltage V to T1 03 Motor rated current A to T1 04 Motor base frequency Hz to T1 05 Number of motor poles T1 06 Motor base speed min 1 to T1 07 Table 3 36 Closed Loop Vector Control A1 02 3 Checked No Description 11 Set F1 01 Encoder 1 Puls...

Page 243: ... Voltage input Set DIP Switch S4 on the drive to analog input side Set H3 05 0 1 Terminal A3 Signal Level Select 0 to 10V Lower Limit at 0 10 to 10V Bipolar Reference Set H3 06 0 Terminal A3 Function Selection Frequency Reference 20 Make sure that the frequency reference gets to the necessary minimum and maximum values Note If drive operation is incorrect make these adjustments Gain adjustment Set...

Page 244: ...3 13 Test Run Checklist 244 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual ...

Page 245: ... This chapter gives information about how to make the machines and devices that use this product comply with European standards and UL standards 4 1 Section Safety 246 4 2 European Standards 248 4 3 UL Standards 273 4 4 China RoHS Compliance 293 4 5 对应中国RoHS指令 294 4 6 Safe Disable Input 295 ...

Page 246: ...oved it can cause serious injury or death Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry when you do work on the drive Tighten loose clothing and remove all metal objects for example watches or rings Loose clothing can catch on the drive and jewelry can conduct electricity and cause serious injury or death Do not modify the drive body or drive circuitry Modifications to drive body and circuitry can cause s...

Page 247: ...mic braking option to the drive make sure that qualified personnel read and obey the Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit Installation Manual TOBPC72060001 If you do not read and obey the manual or if personnel are not qualified it can cause damage to the drive and braking circuit Make sure that all connections are correct after you install the drive and connect peripheral devices Incorrect conn...

Page 248: ... EC ISO EN ISO 13849 1 2015 Cat 3 PL e IEC 62061 A2 2015 SIL CL 3 EN 62061 A2 2015 SIL CL 3 IEC EN 61800 5 2 2007 SIL3 The customer is responsible for displaying the CE Mark on the final device containing this product Customers must verify themselves that the final device is compliant with EU standards CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance It has been confirmed that this product complies with the CE...

Page 249: ...gure 4 2 Wiring Diagram for CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance 1 Connect peripheral options to terminals 1 2 B1 and B2 Do not connect an AC power supply lines to these terminals 2 For circuit protection the main circuit is separated from the surface case that would otherwise come into contact with the main circuit ...

Page 250: ... Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative if the recommended wire gauges for the peripheral devices or options are out of the range of the applicable gauge for the drive Three Phase 200 V Class Table 4 2 Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques 200 V Class Model Terminal Recomm Gauge mm2 Applicable Gauge IP20 Applicable Gauge 1 mm2 Wire Stripping Length 2 mm Terminal Screw Tight...

Page 251: ...2 5 2 5 4 2 5 4 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 2 5 4 2 5 10 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 2018 R L1 S L2 T L3 6 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 6 2 5 16 2 5 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 2 5 2 5 4 2 5 4 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 6 4 4 10 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 2025 R L1 S...

Page 252: ... 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 16 16 25 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 2075 R L1 S L2 T L3 35 2 5 35 25 35 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 U T1 V T2 W T3 25 2 5 25 16 25 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 1 2 50 2 5 50 35 50 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 B1 B2 16 2 5 16 2 5 16 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 16 16 25 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47...

Page 253: ...5 70 50 70 28 M8 Hex socket cap WAF 6 mm 8 9 71 80 50 25 50 M8 Hex bolt slotted 9 0 11 79 7 97 4 2215 R L1 S L2 T L3 50 2P 25 95 2P 70 95 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 U T1 V T2 W T3 50 2P 25 95 2P 70 95 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 1 70 2P 35 120 2P 120 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 3 35 2P 25 70 2P 70 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 95 95 240 M10 Hex bolt slotted 18 23 159 204...

Page 254: ...rminal is necessary to connect a braking unit CDBR series to terminals and 3 Three Phase 400 V Class Table 4 3 Main Circuit Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques 400 V Class Model Terminal Recomm Gauge mm2 Applicable Gauge IP20 Applicable Gauge 1 mm2 Wire Stripping Length 2 mm Terminal Screw Tightening Torque N m lbf in Size Shape 4002 R L1 S L2 T L3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U ...

Page 255: ... 4 2 5 4 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 2 5 4 2 5 10 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 4009 R L1 S L2 T L3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 2 5 2 5 16 2 5 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 2 5 2 5 4 2 5 4 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 2 5 4 2 5 10 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 4015 R L1 ...

Page 256: ...B2 4 2 5 10 2 5 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 10 6 16 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 4039 R L1 S L2 T L3 16 2 5 16 4 16 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 U T1 V T2 W T3 10 2 5 10 6 10 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 1 2 25 2 5 25 6 25 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 6 2 5 6 2 5 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 16 10 25 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 4045 R L1 S L2 T...

Page 257: ... 3 3 5 27 31 16 16 25 M6 Hex bolt 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 4112 R L1 S L2 T L3 50 50 95 95 37 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm 12 14 107 124 U T1 V T2 W T3 50 50 95 95 37 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm 12 14 107 124 1 1 5 25 16 50 50 28 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 8 9 71 80 B1 B2 6 50 25 70 50 70 28 M8 Hex socket cap WAF 6 mm 8 9 71 80 25 25 50 M8 Hex bolt slotted 9 0 11 79 7 97 4 4150 R L1 S L2 T L3 70 50 95 95 ...

Page 258: ... locking nut 20 177 95 95 240 M10 Hex bolt slotted 18 23 159 204 4304 R L1 S L2 T L3 120 2P 70 150 2P 150 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 U T1 V T2 W T3 120 2P 70 150 2P 150 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 1 120 2P 95 185 2P 185 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 3 70 2P 50 95 2P M12 Hex self locking nut 35 310 120 120 240 M12 Hex bolt slotted 32 40 283 354 4371 R L1 S L2 T L3 120 2P 70 150 ...

Page 259: ...uge to maintain compliance with IEC EN 61800 5 1 2007 5 Terminals and 1 have two screws The Recommended Gauge is the wire gauge for one terminal 6 A junction terminal is necessary to connect a braking resistor unit LKEB series to terminals B1 and B2 Connect a Fuse to the Input Side Primary Side The drive circuit protection must comply with IEC EN 61800 5 1 2007 for protection against a short circu...

Page 260: ...on Fuse Rated Current Manufacturer EATON Bussmann 4002 FWH 50B 4003 FWH 50B 4005 FWH 50B 4006 FWH 60B 4007 FWH 60B 4009 FWH 60B 4015 FWH 80B 4018 FWH 90B 4024 FWH 150B 4031 FWH 200B 4039 FWH 200B 4045 FWH 225A 4060 FWH 250A 4075 FWH 275A 4091 FWH 275A 4112 FWH 300A 4150 FWH 325A FWH 400A 1 4180 FWH 500A 4216 FWH 600A 4260 FWH 700A 4304 FWH 800A 4371 FWH 1000B 4414 FWH 1200B 4453 FWH 1200B 4605 FWH...

Page 261: ... recommended fuses Three Phase 200 V Class Table 4 6 Recommended Fuse Three Phase 200 V Class Drive Model Fuse Manufacturer Bussmann Model Qty 2003 FWH 45B 2 2005 FWH 45B 2 2008 FWH 45B 2 2011 FWH 100B 2 2014 FWH 100B 2 2018 FWH 100B 2 2025 FWH 125B 2 2033 FWH 150B 2 2047 FWH 200B 2 2060 FWH 250A 2 2075 FWH 250A FWH 300A 1 2 2088 FWH 250A FWH 275A 1 2 2115 FWH 300A FWH 350A 1 2 2145 FWH 350A FWH 4...

Page 262: ... 1200B 1 2 4414 FWH 1200B FWH 1400A 1 2 4453 FWH 1200B FWH 1600A 1 2 4605 FWH 1600A 2 1 Yaskawa recommends a fuse with a large rated current for applications with repeated loads EMC Directive Drives with built in EMC filters models 2xxxB 4xxxB were tested in accordance with European standard IEC EN 61800 3 2004 A1 2012 and comply with the EMC Directive Use drives with built in EMC filters or insta...

Page 263: ...Use a braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring or put the wires through a metal conduit The maximum wiring length between the drive and motor is 10 m 32 8 ft Keep the wire as short as possible Keep the grounding wire as short as possible 4 Use a cable clamp to ground the motor cable to the metal plate Note Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical specifications ...

Page 264: ...al block for the drive main circuit and the terminal block for the DC reactor have different shapes The drive has a European style terminal block and the DC reactor has a round terminal block Correctly prepare the ends of the wiring Ground Wiring WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized If you touch the internal components of an ener...

Page 265: ...uch electrical equipment that is not grounded it can cause serious injury or death NOTICE To disable the internal EMC filter move the screws from ON to OFF and then tighten to the specified torque If you fully remove the screws or tighten the screws to an incorrect torque it can cause drive failure NOTICE Move the EMC switch screw or screws to the OFF position for networks that are not symmetrical...

Page 266: ...03B 2033B 4002B 4018B Figure 4 8 2047B 4024B 4031B Figure 4 9 2060B 2075B 4039B 4045B Figure 4 10 2088B 2115B 2180B 4060B 4075B 4150B Figure 4 11 2215B 2283B 4180B 4260B Figure 4 12 2346B 2415B 4304B 4371B Figure 4 13 4414B 4605B Figure 4 14 A SW ON B Screw OFF Figure 4 8 EMC Filter Switch Location 1 A SW ON B Screw OFF Figure 4 9 EMC Filter Switch Location 2 ...

Page 267: ...ASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual 267 A SW ON B Screw OFF Figure 4 10 EMC Filter Switch Location 3 A SW ON B Screw OFF Figure 4 11 EMC Filter Switch Location 4 A SW ON B Screw OFF Figure 4 12 EMC Filter Switch Location 5 ...

Page 268: ... Model Screw Size Tightening Torque N m 2003 2075 4002 4045 M4 20 1 0 1 3 2088 2180 4060 4150 M4 25 1 0 1 3 2215 2415 4180 4605 M5 25 2 0 2 5 Installing the External EMC Noise Filter This product model 2xxxA 4xxxA must meet conditions in this section to comply with EN 61800 3 2004 A1 2012 Connect an EMC noise filter to the input side primary side that complies with European standards as specified ...

Page 269: ...le for the drive and motor wiring or put the wires through a metal conduit The maximum wiring length between the drive and motor is 10 m 32 8 ft Keep the cable between the drive and motor as short as possible Keep the grounding wire as short as possible 4 Use a cable clamp to ground the motor cable to the metal plate Note Make sure that the protective ground wire complies with technical specificat...

Page 270: ...03 install a DC reactor The main circuit terminal block for the drive and the terminal blocks for the DC reactor come in different shapes The drive has a European style terminal block and the DC reactor has a round terminal block Correctly prepare the ends of the wiring Ground Wiring WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the drive is energized If you to...

Page 271: ...3A FS5972 410 99 1 Schaffner 2346A FS5972 410 99 1 Schaffner 2415A FS5972 600 99 1 Schaffner Table 4 12 External EMC Noise Filter 4xxxA Model EMC Noise Filter Model Quantity Manufacturer 4002A B84143A0010R106 1 TDK 4003A B84143A0010R106 1 TDK 4005A B84143A0010R106 1 TDK 4006A B84143A0010R106 1 TDK 4007A B84143A0020R106 1 TDK 4009A B84143A0020R106 1 TDK 4015A B84143A0035R106 1 TDK 4018A B84143A0035...

Page 272: ...4605A FS5972 410 99 2 Schaffner DC Reactor Install the DC reactor listed in Table 4 13 for drive models 2003 2005 4002 4003 to comply with IEC EN 61000 3 2 Table 4 13 DC Reactors for Harmonic Suppression Drive Model DC Reactor Manufacturer Yaskawa Electric Corporation Model Rating 2003 UZDA B 5 4 A 8 mH 2005 UZDA B 5 4 A 8 mH 4002 UZDA B 3 2 A 28 mH 4003 UZDA B 3 2 A 28 mH ...

Page 273: ...andard Use the tools recommend by the terminal manufacturer to crimp the closed loop crimp terminal Refer to Closed Loop Crimp Terminals on page 284 for details about closed loop crimp terminal UL compliant products Refer to Three Phase 200 V Class on page 275 and Three Phase 400 V Class on page 279 to select wire gauge Read the following instructions before wiring the terminal block Notes on Wiri...

Page 274: ...to the terminal block lightly pull on the wires to make sure that they do not come out of the terminals Remove the correct section of the wiring cover to make wiring easier Regularly tighten loose terminal block screws to their specified tightening torques Do not let strain on the wiring cause damage Use a strain relief near the wiring to release the tension Refer to Figure 4 21 for an example A S...

Page 275: ...nt value Use terminals 1 2 3 B1 and B2 to connect peripheral options such as a DC reactor or a braking resistor Do not connect anything other than optional devices Refer to the specific instruction manual of each device for wire gauges when connecting peripheral devices or options to terminals 1 2 3 B1 and B2 Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative if the recommended wire gauges for t...

Page 276: ...B1 B2 14 14 10 14 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 10 14 8 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 2014 R L1 S L2 T L3 10 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 10 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 8 14 3 14 3 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 14 14 10 14 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 10 14 8 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 2018 R L1 S L2 T L3 8 14 ...

Page 277: ...otted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 6 8 6 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 2060 R L1 S L2 T L3 1 14 1 6 1 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 U T1 V T2 W T3 3 14 3 6 3 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 1 2 1 0 14 1 0 4 1 0 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 B1 B2 8 14 8 14 8 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 6 6 4 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 2075 R L1 S L2 T L3 1 0 14...

Page 278: ...WAF 6 mm 8 9 71 80 4 4 1 0 M8 Hex bolt slotted 9 0 11 79 7 97 4 2180 R L1 S L2 T L3 250 2 250 2 0 250 37 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm 12 14 107 124 U T1 V T2 W T3 300 2 300 3 0 300 37 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm 12 14 107 124 1 1 4 5 2 0 6 2 0 1 0 2 0 28 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 8 9 71 80 3 5 2 0 4 2 0 1 2 0 28 M8 Hex socket cap WAF 6 mm 8 9 71 80 4 4 1 0 M8 Hex bolt slotted 9 0 11 79 7 97 4 2215...

Page 279: ...e gauges 2 Remove insulation from the ends of wires to expose the length of wire shown 3 For wire gauges more than AWG 8 tighten to a tightening torque of 4 1 N m to 4 5 N m 36 lbf in to 40 lbf in 4 Terminals and 1 have two screws The Recommended Gauge is the wire gauge for one terminal 5 A junction terminal is necessary to connect a braking unit CDBR series to terminals and 3 Three Phase 400 V Cl...

Page 280: ...4 10 14 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 10 14 8 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 4007 R L1 S L2 T L3 14 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 U T1 V T2 W T3 14 14 6 14 6 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 1 2 12 14 3 14 3 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 B1 B2 14 14 10 14 10 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 10 14 8 M4 Phillips slotted combo 1 2 1 5 10 6 13 3 4009 R L1 S L2 T L3 12 14 6 14 6 1...

Page 281: ...5 45 49 B1 B2 10 14 8 14 8 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 8 10 6 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 4031 R L1 S L2 T L3 6 14 3 8 3 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 U T1 V T2 W T3 8 14 4 10 4 18 M5 Slotted 2 3 2 5 19 8 22 3 1 2 4 14 1 8 1 20 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 5 5 5 45 49 B1 B2 10 14 8 14 8 10 M4 Slotted 1 5 1 7 13 5 15 6 10 6 M6 Phillips slotted combo 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 4039 R L1 S L...

Page 282: ... 6 0 47 8 53 1 4091 R L1 S L2 T L3 1 0 6 2 0 2 2 0 27 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 8 9 71 80 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 6 2 0 2 2 0 27 M6 Hex socket cap WAF 5 mm 8 9 71 80 1 2 0 2 4 0 2 4 0 27 M8 Hex socket cap WAF 6 mm 10 12 89 107 B1 B2 3 14 3 10 3 21 M6 Slotted 3 3 5 27 31 4 6 4 M6 Hex bolt 5 4 6 0 47 8 53 1 4112 R L1 S L2 T L3 3 0 2 250 2 0 250 37 M10 Hex socket cap WAF 8 mm 12 14 107 124 U T1 V T2 W T3 2...

Page 283: ...P 1 0 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 2 2 350 M10 Hex bolt slotted 18 23 159 204 4260 R L1 S L2 T L3 3 0 2P 3 4 0 2P 2 0 4 0 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 U T1 V T2 W T3 3 0 2P 3 4 0 2P 2 0 4 0 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 1 4 0 2P 2 250 2P 4 0 250 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 3 1 0 2P 4 1 0 2P 1 0 2P M10 Hex self locking nut 20 177 2 2 350 M10 Hex bolt slotted 18 23 159 204 43...

Page 284: ...cable gauges 2 Remove insulation from the ends of wires to expose the length of wire shown 3 For wire gauges more than AWG 8 tighten to a tightening torque of 4 1 N m to 4 5 N m 36 lbf in to 40 lbf in 4 Terminals and 1 have two screws The Recommended Gauge is the wire gauge for one terminal 5 A junction terminal is necessary to connect a braking resistor unit LKEB series to terminals B1 and B2 Clo...

Page 285: ... TP 060 3 0 2P 80 10 TD 323 TD 312 TP 080 250 2P 250 2P R150 10 TD 325 TD 313 TP 150 350 2P R200 10 TD 327 TD 314 TP 200 2415 1 M12 R60 10 YF 1 YET 300 1 TD 321 TD 311 TP 060 3 0 2P 80 10 TD 323 TD 312 TP 080 250 2P R150 10 TD 325 TD 313 TP 150 300 2P 350 2P R200 10 TD 327 TD 314 TP 200 4002 4003 12 M4 R5 5 4 YA 4 AD 900 TP 005 4005 4009 10 M4 R5 5 4 YA 4 AD 900 TP 005 4015 4018 10 M5 R5 5 5 YA 4 ...

Page 286: ...080 4 0 4P R100 12 TD 324 TD 312 TP 100 300 4P 300 4P R150 12 TD 325 TD 313 TP 150 400 4P R200 12 TD 327 TD 314 TP 200 1 Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection Use branch circuit protection to protect against short circuits and to maintain compliance with UL61800 5 1 Yaskawa recommends connecting semiconductor protect...

Page 287: ... 3 12 7 FWH 50B 2014 3 0 4 17 FWH 80B 2018 4 0 5 20 7 FWH 80B 2025 5 5 7 5 30 FWH 125B 2033 7 5 10 40 3 FWH 150B 2047 11 15 58 2 FWH 200B 2060 15 20 78 4 FWH 225A 2075 18 5 25 96 FWH 225A FWH 250A 1 2088 22 30 82 FWH 225A FWH 250A 1 2115 30 40 111 FWH 275A FWH 300A 1 2145 37 50 136 FWH 275A FWH 350A 1 2180 45 60 164 FWH 325A FWH 450A 1 2215 55 75 200 FWH 600A 2283 75 100 271 FWH 800A 2346 90 125 3...

Page 288: ... power supply in the drive is used Use the UL approved class 2 power supply for external power supply Analog input A1 to A3 AC V V The LVLC power supply in the drive is used Use the UL approved class 2 power supply for external power supply Analog output FM AM AC The LVLC power supply in the drive is used Safe disable Input H1 H2 HC The LVLC power supply in the drive is used Use the UL approved cl...

Page 289: ...cts motor overload the drive will trigger an oL1 Motor Overload and stop the drive output You can set a motor overload alarm Set H2 02 1F Term M3 M4 Function Selection Motor Overload Alarm oL1 to enable this function If the motor overload level is more than 90 of the oL1 detection level the output terminal activates and triggers an overload alarm Note When you connect only one motor to a drive set...

Page 290: ...he motor operates continuously at 10 to 100 base frequency 3 Constant Torque 100 1 SpeedRange Use this setting for vector motors with a speed range for constant torque of 1 100 The speed control for this motor is 1 to 100 when at 100 load Operating slower than 1 speed at 100 load will cause motor overload Load Tolerance Cooling Capability Overload Characteristics at 100 motor load This motor is de...

Page 291: ...ion at 100 load hot start the default setting triggers the electronic thermal protector Figure 4 23 shows an example of the electronic thermal protector operation time Motor overload protection operates in the range between a cold start and a hot start This example shows a general purpose motor operating at the base frequency with L1 02 set to 1 0 min Cold start Shows the motor protection operatio...

Page 292: ... switches ON L1 04 Motor Thermistor oH Fault Select No Hex Name Description Default Range L1 04 0483 Motor Thermistor oH Fault Select Sets the drive operation when the PTC input signal to the drive is at the oH4 Motor Overheat Fault PTC Input detection level 1 0 2 0 Ramp to Stop The drive ramps the motor to stop in the deceleration time Fault relay output terminal MA MC turns ON and MB MC turns OF...

Page 293: ...k outside of the product during normal use within this period and will have no serious impact on the environment the human body or property The environment friendly use period for this product is 15 years This period is not the product warranty period Information on Hazardous Substances in This Product Table 4 21 shows the details on hazardous substances contained in this product Table 4 21 Conten...

Page 294: ... 中间的数字为在中国生产销售以及进口的电子电气产品的环保使用期限 年限 电子电气产品的环 保使用期限从生产日期算起 在期限内 正常使用产品的过程中 不会有特定的6种有害物质外泄进而对环境 人 和财产造成深刻影响 本产品的环保使用期限为15年 但需要注意的是环保使用期限并非产品的质量保证期限 本产品中含有有害物质的信息 本产品中所含有害物质的详细信息如表 4 22所示 表 4 22 本产品中有害物质的名称及含量 部件名称 有害物质 铅 Pb 汞 Hg 镉 Cd 六价铬 Cr VI 多溴联苯 PBB 多溴二苯醚 PBDE 实装基板 电子元件 黄铜螺钉 铝压铸 本表格依据SJ T 11364的规定编制 表示该有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在GB T 26572规定的限量要求以下 表示该有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出GB T 26572规定的限量要求 注 本产品符合欧盟Ro...

Page 295: ...SO 13849 1 and IEC EN 61508 It also has a safety status monitor to detect safety circuit errors When you install the drive as a component in a system you must make sure that the system complies with the applicable safety standards Refer to Table 4 24 for safety function specifications Table 4 24 Safe Disable Specifications Item Description Input Output Input 2 Safe Disable input H1 H2 Signal ON le...

Page 296: ...tain the Safe Disable input If personnel are not approved it can cause serious injury or death WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard Do not use the drive output signals to control external holding brakes or dynamic brakes for functional safety Use a system that conforms to the functional safety requirements Incorrect application of the Safe Disable function can cause serious injury or death Systems that ...

Page 297: ...ng Method Selection setting does not have an effect on the stopping method The Safe Torque Off status is only possible with the Safe Disable function Clear the Run command to stop the drive Turning off drive output a baseblock condition Safe Torque Off Note When it is necessary to ramp to stop the motor do not turn off terminals H1 and H2 until the motor fully stops This will prevent the motor fro...

Page 298: ...nual for the safety device for more information about the Safety function It is possible to switch polarity of the Safety monitor output signal with the MFDO function settings Refer to Table 4 25 for setting instructions Keypad Display If the two input channels are OFF Open the keypad will flash STo Safe Torque OFF The keypad flashes SToF Safe Torque OFF Hardware when one input channel is OFF Open...

Page 299: ...YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual 299 5 Network Communications 5 1 Section Safety 300 5 2 Field Bus Network Support 301 5 3 MEMOBUS Modbus Communications 302 ...

Page 300: ...ive CR700 Technical Manual 5 1 Section Safety DANGER Do not ignore the safety messages in this manual If you ignore the safety messages in this manual it will cause serious injury or death The manufacturer is not responsible for injuries or damage to equipment ...

Page 301: ...ort various other network communications Standard Internal Communication Interfaces The following communication interfaces are built into this product as standard MEMOBUS Modbus RS 485 Communication Option The following table lists the field bus networks compatible with this product Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative to place a communication option order Type of Communications Op...

Page 302: ...ave drive Figure 5 1 PLC and Drive Connection Example Communication Specifications Table 5 1 lists the specifications for the MEMOBUS Modbus communications Table 5 1 MEMOBUS Modbus Specifications Item Specification Interface RS 485 Synchronization method Asynchronous start stop synchronization Communication parameter Communications speed 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 76 8 115 2 kbps Data length 8...

Page 303: ... Node Address H5 02 Communication Speed Selection H5 03 Communication Parity Selection H5 04 Communication Error Stop Method H5 05 Comm Fault Detection Selection H5 06 Drive Transmit Wait Time H5 09 CE Detection Time H5 10 Modbus Register 0025H Unit Sel H5 11 Comm ENTER Command Mode 5 Shut the power off and wait for the keypad display to go out completely 6 Turn the power back on 7 The drive is re...

Page 304: ...table Table 5 2 Required Parameter Setting for Drive Control from MEMOBUS Modbus LOCAL Control Selected No Name Setting Value External reference 1 b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 2 Memobus Modbus Communications b1 02 Run Command Selection 1 2 Memobus Modbus Communications External reference 2 b1 15 Frequency Reference Selection 2 2 Memobus Modbus Communications b1 16 Run Command Selection 2 ...

Page 305: ...respond to the master If the timer is set and a response message is not returned back from the slave within a certain amount of time the master retransmits the message Response Message from Slave When the slave receives the command message from the master it processes the data that was sent When the wait time set in H5 06 Drive Transmit Wait Time passes it sends a response message to the master In...

Page 306: ... sure that there are no errors in the data The drive uses the procedure below to calculate CRC 16 then the drive compares that data with the CRC 16 value in the message If the CRC 16 values do not agree the drive will not execute a command message When you calculate CRC 16 in MEMOBUS Modbus communications make sure that you set the start value as FFFF Hex All 16 bits must be 1 Use this procedure t...

Page 307: ...00 0011 XOR w A001 Hex 1010 0000 0000 0001 Shift 8 0111 0001 0100 0001 1 XOR result 1000 0001 0011 1110 XOR w A001 Hex 1010 0000 0000 0001 Perform operations with next data function code XOR result 1101 0001 0100 0000 CRC 16 1101 0001 0100 0000 D 1 4 0 Lower Upper Continue from here with next data Response Data The drive does the CRC 16 calculation for the response message and makes sure that the ...

Page 308: ...lding registers and each 8 higher bits and 8 lower bits in order in the command message for the write data You can write to a maximum of 16 holding registers Table 5 8 shows example messages when you use the PLC to set Forward run in the drive of slave 1 with a 60 00 Hz frequency reference When you rewrite the parameter value with the write command through the H5 11 Comm ENTER Command Mode setting...

Page 309: ...through the H5 11 Comm ENTER Command Mode setting you must use the Enter command to save and enable the contents of the changes Refer to H5 11 Comm ENTER Command Mode on page 739 and Enter Command on page 311 for more information Table 5 9 Message Example When Writing to More than One Holding Register Reading the Indicated Register Byte Command Message Response Message When Normal Response Message...

Page 310: ...0 00 Hz 6000 1770H 0028H U1 09 Torque Reference 100 0 1000 03E8H Table 5 10 Message Example When Reading the Contents of Non Consecutive Holding Registers Byte Command Message Response Message When Normal Response Message When There is a Fault Setting Data Hex Setting Data Hex Setting Data Hex 0 Slave address 01 Slave address 01 Slave address 01 1 Function code 67 Function code 67 Function code E7...

Page 311: ...r 2 data Upper 05 15 Lower DC 16 CRC 16 Upper 55 17 Lower 59 Note The number of bytes set in the command message set the data quantity 2 during the command message Enter Command When you use MEMOBUS Modbus communications to write parameters from the PLC to the drive H5 11 Comm ENTER Command Mode lets you use the Enter command to enable these parameters This section gives information about the Ente...

Page 312: ...ally changes the default settings for the related parameters Fault detection when you set more than one parameter Accepts and responds as usual to correct setting data if the data contains parameter setting errors The drive discards the disabled setting data but will not return an error message If there is a setting error in a parameter the drive responds with a fault The drive discards the data t...

Page 313: ...ference source changes to MEMOBUS Modbus communications However the frequency reference source gives priority to the communications option when the communication option is connected to the drive bit 5 Multi function input 2 When the multi function input command is H1 02 41 Reverse RUN 2 Wire bit 5 is ComCtrl Note When the bit is switched ON as ComCtrl the Run command source changes to MEMOBUS Modb...

Page 314: ... S7 input of broadcast message 1 Enabled 0 Disabled bit F Terminal S8 input of broadcast message 1 Enabled 0 Disabled 0010 001A Reserved 001B Analog monitor option AO A3 analog output 1 value 10 V 4000 Hex 001C Analog monitor option AO A3 analog output 2 value 10 V 4000 Hex 001D Digital output option DO A3 output value binary 001E 001F Reserved 15C0 bit 0 Extended multi function input command 1 bi...

Page 315: ...nge 101 to 1231 decimal the default value at power up 101 Set the month and the date in MMDD format MM 01 to 12 decimal DD 01 to 31 decimal 3007 Set the Date Information Setting range 0 to 8 decimal the default value at power up 8 Set the values specified in 3004H to 3006H as the date and time Command Data 1 Response Data 0 normal 8 fault Monitor Data Monitor data can only be read ...

Page 316: ...Fault Description 1 bit 0 oC Overcurrent GF Ground Fault bit 1 ov Overvoltage bit 2 oL2 Drive Overload bit 3 oH1 Heatsink Overheat oH2 External Overheat H1 XX B bit 4 rH Braking Resistor Overheat rr Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault bit 5 6 Reserved bit 7 EF0 Option Card External Fault EF1 to EF10 External Fault bit 8 CPFxx Hardware Fault Note Includes oFx bit 9 oL1 Motor Overload oL3 oL4 Overtorqu...

Page 317: ...cy Display Unit Selection 0025 U1 06 Output Voltage Ref units 0 1 V Note Able to replace the setting unit with H5 10 Modbus Register 0025H Unit Sel 0026 U1 03 Output Current units 0 1 A 0027 U1 08 Output Power 0028 U1 09 Torque Reference 0029 Fault Description 2 bit 0 Reserved bit 1 GF Ground Fault bit 2 PF Input Phase Loss bit 3 LF Output Phase Loss bit 4 rH Braking Resistor Overheat bit 5 Reserv...

Page 318: ...ved 002C Drive Status 2 bit 0 During Run 1 During run bit 1 During zero speed 1 During zero speed bit 2 Speed agreement 1 During agreement bit 3 User defined speed agreement 1 During agreement bit 4 Frequency Detection 1 1 Output frequency L4 01 bit 5 Frequency Detection 2 1 Output frequency L4 01 bit 6 Drive ready 1 Run ready bit 7 During low voltage detection 1 During detection bit 8 During base...

Page 319: ...served 0031 U1 07 DC Bus Voltage unit 1 V 0032 U1 09 Torque Reference unit 1 0033 Reserved 0034 0035 Product code 2 ASCII region 0036 003C Reserved 003D Communications error description Note The description of the communications error is saved until the fault is reset bit 0 CRC Error bit 1 Data Length Error bit 2 Reserved bit 3 Parity Error bit 4 Overrun Error bit 5 Framing Error bit 6 Timeout bit...

Page 320: ...U Monitor for details and refer to Fault Trace Fault History Descriptions for details about register values 0098 0099 U4 01 Cumulative Ope Time Example When U4 01 Cumulative Ope Time is 12345 0098 Hex 1234 and 0099 Hex 5 009A 009B U4 03 Cooling Fan Ope Time Example When U4 03 Cooling Fan Ope Time is 12345 009A Hex 1234 and 009B Hex 5 009C 00AA Reserved 00AB Drive rated current Note The unit of dis...

Page 321: ... Fault bit 6 oC Overcurrent bit 7 ov Overvoltage bit 8 oH Heatsink Overheat bit 9 oH1 Heatsink Overheat bit A oL1 Motor Overload bit B oL2 Drive Overload bit C oL3 Overtorque Detection 1 bit D oL4 Overtorque Detection 2 bit E rr Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault bit F rH Braking Resistor Overheat 00C1 Fault Description 4 bit 0 EF3 External Fault Terminal S3 bit 1 EF4 External Fault Terminal S4 bit ...

Page 322: ...oH Encoder PG Hardware Fault bit 8 E5 MECHATROLINK Watchdog Timer Err bit 9 F Reserved 00C4 Fault Description 7 bit 0 Reserved bit 1 EF1 External Fault Terminal S1 bit 2 EF2 External Fault Terminal S2 bit 3 4 Reserved bit 5 CoF Current Offset Fault bit 6 C Reserved bit D rF Braking Resistor Fault bit E boL BrakingTransistor Overload Fault bit F Reserved 00C5 Fault Description 8 bit 0 Reserved bit ...

Page 323: ...t D EF8 External Fault Terminal S8 bit E FAn Internal Fan Fault bit F oS Overspeed 00C9 Minor Fault Description 3 bit 0 dEv Speed Deviation bit 1 PGo Encoder PG Feedback Loss bit 2 oPr Keypad Connection Fault bit 3 CE Modbus Communication Error bit 4 bUS Option Communication Error bit 5 CALL Serial Comm Transmission Error bit 6 oL1 Motor Overload bit 7 oL2 Drive Overload bit 8 Reserved bit 9 EF0 O...

Page 324: ... IGBT Maintenance Time 90 bit 2 LT 3 SoftChargeBypassRelay MainteTime bit 3 LT 4 IGBT Maintenance Time 50 bit 4 boL Braking Transistor Overload bit 5 F Reserved 00CD 00CE Reserved 00CF Minor Fault Description 7 bit 0 FWdL Fwd Limit FWdL bit 1 rEvL Rev Limit rEvL bit 2 3 Reserved bit 4 oL5 Overload Detection oL5 bit 5 oL6 Light load Accel 2 Fault oL6 bit 6 F Reserved 00D0 CPF Contents 1 bit 0 1 Res...

Page 325: ...it D CPF29 On Delay Error bit E CPF30 BB On Error bit F CPF31 ASIC Code Error 00D2 CPF Contents 3 bit 0 CPF32 ASIC Startup Error bit 1 CPF33 Watch dog Error bit 2 CPF34 Power Clock Error bit 3 CPF35 Ext A D Conv Error bit 4 CPU36 ASIC COM Error bit 5 CPU37 ASIC COM Error bit 6 CPU38 EEPROM Data Error bit 7 CPU39 CPU ASIC Communication Error bit 8 CPF40 Control Circuit Error bit 9 CPF41 Control Cir...

Page 326: ... 1 bit 6 oFA36 CI Check Error bit 7 oFA37 Drive Receive Time Over 2 bit 8 oFA38 Control Reference Error bit 9 oFA39 Drive Receive Time Over 3 bit A oFA40 CtrlResSel 1Err bit B oFA41 Drive Receive Time Over 4 bit C oFA42 CtrlResSel 2Err bit D oFA43 Drive Receive Time Over 5 bit E F Reserved 00DC oFb0x Description CN5 B bit 0 oFb00 Option Not Compatible with Port bit 1 oFb01 Option Fault Connection ...

Page 327: ...rved 00E1 oFC0x Description CN5 C bit 0 oFC00 Option Not Compatible with Port bit 1 oFC01 Option Fault Connection Error bit 2 oFC02 Duplicate Options bit 3 4 Reserved bit 5 oFC05 Option A D Error bit 6 oFC06 Option Communication Error bit 7 F Reserved 00E2 oFC1x Description CN5 C bit 0 oFC10 Option RAM Error bit 1 oFC11 Option Ope Mode Error bit 2 oFC12 Drive Receive CRC Error bit 3 oFC13 Drive Re...

Page 328: ...ription 11 bit 0 TiM Keypad Time Not Set bit 1 bAT Keypad Battery Low Voltage bit 2 D Reserved bit E SCF Safety Circuit Fault bit F Reserved 00EB 00ED Reserved 00EE Fault Description 12 bit 0 2 Reserved bit 3 CP1 Comparator 1 Limit Fault bit 4 CP2 Comparator 2 Limit Fault bit 5 bCE Bluetooth Communication Fault bit 6 F Reserved 00EF 00FA Reserved 00FB Output current Note The unit of display varies...

Page 329: ...raking Transistor Fault 0010 rH Braking Resistor Overheat 0011 EF3 External Fault Terminal S3 0012 EF4 External Fault Terminal S4 0013 EF5 External Fault Terminal S5 0014 EF6 External Fault Terminal S6 0015 EF7 External Fault Terminal S7 0016 EF8 External Fault Terminal S8 0017 FAn Internal Fan Fault 0018 oS Overspeed 0019 dEv Speed Deviation 001A PGo Encoder PG Feedback Loss 001B PF Input Phase L...

Page 330: ...01 Option Fault Connection Error 0106 oFA05 Option A D Error 0107 oFA06 Option Communication Error 0111 oFA10 Option RAM Error Fault Code Hex Name 0112 oFA11 Option Ope Mode Error 0113 oFA12 Drive Receive CRC Error 0114 oFA13 Drive Receive Frame Error 0115 oFA14 Drive Receive Abort Error 0116 oFA15 Option Receive CRC Error 0117 oFA16 Option Receive Frame Error 0118 oFA17 Option Receive Abort Error...

Page 331: ...block 0009 EF3 External Fault Terminal S3 000A EF4 External Fault Terminal S4 000B EF5 External Fault Terminal S5 000C EF6 External Fault Terminal S6 000D EF7 External Fault Terminal S7 000E EF8 External Fault Terminal S8 000F FAn Internal Fan Fault 0010 oS Overspeed 0011 dEv Speed Deviation 0012 PGo Encoder PG Feedback Loss 0014 CE Modbus Communication Error 0015 bUS Option Communication Error 00...

Page 332: ... 00 Language Selection A1 01 Access Level Selection A1 02 Control Method Selection A1 03 Initialize Parameters A1 04 Password A1 05 Password Setting E1 03 V f Pattern Selection o2 04 Drive Model KVA Selection Writes the read only data 23 DC Bus Undervoltage Write Error During Uv Undervoltage a Uv write disabled parameter was written 24 Error Writing Data During Parameter Processing Tried to write ...

Page 333: ...6 2 Types of Faults Minor Faults Alarms and Errors 336 6 3 List of Fault Minor Fault Alarm and Error Codes 337 6 4 Fault 342 6 5 Minor Faults Alarms 363 6 6 Parameter Setting Errors 373 6 7 Auto Tuning Errors 377 6 8 Backup Function Operating Mode Display and Errors 381 6 9 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults 382 ...

Page 334: ...ct Yaskawa before you energize the drive or peripheral devices If you do not fix the problem before you operate the drive or peripheral devices it can cause serious injury or death Only let approved personnel install wire maintain examine replace parts and repair the drive If personnel are not approved it can cause serious injury or death Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry when you do work on t...

Page 335: ...e product made by the user NOTICE Damage to Equipment When you touch the drive and circuit boards make sure that you observe correct electrostatic discharge ESD procedures If you do not follow procedures it can cause ESD damage to the drive circuitry Do not break the electrical connection between the drive and the motor when the drive is outputting voltage Incorrect equipment sequencing can cause ...

Page 336: ...ssary to do Fault Reset The keypad shows the alarm code and and ALM ERR on the LED Status Ring flash The drive will continue to operate the motor Some alarms let the user select a motor stopping method Note The drive will coast to stop when it detects bb Baseblock or STo Safe Torque OFF If S1 54 1 then the drive output will be interrupted while the Brake release command is simultaneously shut OFF ...

Page 337: ...d Fault 342 CALL 001D Serial Comm Transmission Error Flashing Alarm 364 CE 0014 Modbus Communication Error Flashing Alarm 364 CE 0021 Modbus Communication Error Illuminated Fault 343 CF 0025 Control Fault Illuminated Fault 343 CnT1 Number of Driving Over Flashing Alarm 364 CnT1 Number of Driving Over Illuminated Fault 343 CnT2 Number of Driving Over Flashing Alarm 364 CnT2 Number of Driving Over I...

Page 338: ...luminated Fault 346 EF8 000E External Fault Terminal S8 Flashing Alarm 367 EF8 0016 External Fault Terminal S8 Illuminated Fault 346 EF9 000F External Fault Terminal S9 Flashing Alarm 367 EF9 0017 External Fault Terminal S9 Illuminated Fault 346 EF10 000G External Fault Terminal S10 Flashing Alarm 367 EF10 0018 External Fault Terminal S10 Illuminated Fault 346 End1 Excessive Rated Voltage Setting ...

Page 339: ... Fault Connection Error Illuminated Fault 348 oFA02 0103 Duplicate Options Illuminated Fault 348 oFA03 to oFA06 0104 to 0107 Option Card Error at Option Port CN5 A Illuminated Fault 348 349 oFA10 oFA11 0111 0112 Option Card Error at Option Port CN5 A Illuminated Fault 349 349 oFA12 to oFA17 0113 to 0118 Option Card Error at Option Port CN5 A Illuminated Fault 349 349 oFA30 to oFA43 0131 to 013E Co...

Page 340: ...er Setting Error 375 oPE11 Carrier Frequency Setting Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 375 oPE18 Online Tuning Param Setting Err Flashing Parameter Setting Error 375 oPE22 Parameter Setting Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 375 oPE23 Parameter Setting Error Flashing Parameter Setting Error 376 oPE24 Parameter Setting Fault Flashing Parameter Setting Error 376 oPE25 Parameter Setting Erro...

Page 341: ...C Safe Torque OFF Flashing Alarm 371 SToF 003B Safe Torque OFF Flashing Alarm 371 SvE 0026 Zero Servo Fault Illuminated Fault 361 TiM 0089 Keypad Time Not Set Flashing Alarm 372 TiM 0401 Keypad Time Not Set Illuminated Fault 361 TrPC 0042 IGBT Maintenance Time 90 Flashing Alarm 372 Uv 0001 DC Bus Undervoltage Flashing Alarm 372 Uv1 0002 DC Bus Undervoltage Illuminated Fault 361 Uv2 0003 Control Po...

Page 342: ...et L8 55 0 Internal DB TransistorProtection Disable The braking transistor in the drive is broken Replace the entire drive Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions bUS Option Communication Error The drive did not receive a signal from the controller The communications cable wiring is incorrect Correct wiring errors There is a short circuit in the communications ...

Page 343: ...lete stop Note The drive detects this error if the torque reference is more than the torque limit for 3 seconds or longer while the drive ramps to stop Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions CnT1 Number of Driving Over U4 53 Num of Driv 1 Low or U4 54 Num of Driv 1 High is more than the setting value of S2 13 Motor1 Number of Driving Limit 1 Adjust S2 09 Motor1 Num...

Page 344: ...ains If the fault stays replace the control board or the drive For instructions on replacing the control board contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative Note Detected if there is an error in the data written to the EEPROM of the drive Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Fault trace is not available for this fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions CPF25 Terminal Board not Connected The...

Page 345: ...ossible Solutions EF3 External Fault Terminal S3 MFDI terminal S3 caused an external fault through an external device 1 Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the cause 2 Clear the external fault input in the MFDI The wiring is incorrect Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S3 External Fault H1 03 20 to 2B is set to MFDI terminal S3 but the terminal is not in use C...

Page 346: ...al S10 caused an external fault through an external device 1 Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the cause 2 Clear the external fault input in the MFDI The wiring is incorrect Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S10 External fault H1 10 20 to 2B is assigned to MFDI terminal S10 that is not in use Correctly set the MFDI Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault C...

Page 347: ... to clear the fault Set L8 07 Output Phase Loss Protection Sel to enable and disable LF detection Code Name Causes Possible Solutions nSE Node Setup Error The H1 xx 47 Node Setup CANopen terminal was activated during run The drive received a Run command while the Node Setup function was active Stop the drive when the Node Setup function is in use Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name ...

Page 348: ...A00 Option Not Compatible with Port The option connected to connector CN5 A is not compatible Connect the option to the correct connector Note Encoder options are not compatible with connector CN5 A Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Fault trace is not available for these faults Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oFA01 Option Fault Connection Error The option card connected to connector CN5...

Page 349: ...Name Causes Possible Solutions oFA13 Drive Receive Frame Error A fault occurred in the option card 1 De energize the drive 2 Make sure that the option card is correctly connected to the connector 3 If the problem continues replace the option card Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oFA14 Drive Receive Abort Error A fault occurred in the option card 1 De ene...

Page 350: ...ses Possible Solutions oFA34 Memobus Time Over A fault occurred in the option card 1 De energize the drive 2 Make sure that the option card is correctly connected to the connector 3 If the problem continues replace the option card Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oFA35 Drive Receive Time Over 1 A fault occurred in the option card 1 De energize the drive ...

Page 351: ... Drive Receive Time Over 5 A fault occurred in the option card 1 De energize the drive 2 Make sure that the option card is correctly connected to the connector 3 If the problem continues replace the option card Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oFb00 Option Not Compatible with Port The option connected to connector CN5 B is not compatible Connect the opti...

Page 352: ... Possible Solutions oFb11 Option Ope Mode Error A fault occurred in the option card 1 De energize the drive 2 Make sure that the option card is correctly connected to the connector 3 If the problem continues replace the option card Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oFb12 Drive Receive CRC Error A fault occurred in the option card 1 De energize the drive 2...

Page 353: ...onnected to connector CN5 C was changed during operation 1 De energize the drive 2 Refer to the option card manual and correctly connect the option card to the connector on the drive Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oFC02 Duplicate Options The same option cards or the same type of option cards are connected to connectors CN5 A B and C Connect the option ...

Page 354: ...d to the connector 3 If the problem continues replace the option card Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oFC12 Drive Receive CRC Error A fault occurred in the option card 1 De energize the drive 2 Make sure that the option card is correctly connected to the connector 3 If the problem continues replace the option card Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the faul...

Page 355: ...Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oFC54 Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5 C A fault occurred in the option Refer to the manual for the PG RT3 option card Note Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oFC55 Resolver Error A fault occurred in the option card Refer to the manual for the PG RT3 or PG F3 option card Note Do a Fault R...

Page 356: ...overload tolerance will decrease at low speeds Note The drive detects this fault if the motor overheat signal that was entered to an analog input terminals A1 A2 or A3 is more than the alarm detection level If H3 02 H3 10 or H3 06 E MFAI Function Select Motor Temperature PTC Input was set Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault If the drive detects this fault it will operate the motor as specified by ...

Page 357: ...tation High Flux Set n3 23 0 Overexcitation Operation Select Enabled in both directions The output current is fluctuating due to input power supply phase loss Make sure that there is no phase loss and repair problems Note The drive detects this fault if the electronic thermal protector of the drive triggered the motor overload protection Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possibl...

Page 358: ...s Possible Solutions oL6 Light load Accel 2 Fault oL6 The setting for hold level and fault detection level of Light load 2 functions are not appropriate Output frequency S4 08 Light load 2 Activation Freq Adjust S4 10 L L 2 Motoring Hold Level S4 12 L L 2 Regen Hold Level and S4 15 L L 2 Fault Detection Level settings Note The drive detects this fault if the motor speed is more than the value set ...

Page 359: ...tage is more than the ov detection level while the drive is running The ov detection level is approximately 410 V with 200 V class drives The detection level is approximately 820 V with 400 V class drives Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions PF Input Phase Loss There is a phase loss in the drive input power Correct errors with the wiring for main circuit drive in...

Page 360: ...emperature If the duty cycle is higher than the braking resistor rating the drive will show the alarm Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Parameter L8 01 enables and disables rH detection Code Name Causes Possible Solutions rr Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault The drive control circuit is damaged There is a malfunction in the internal braking transistor of the drive Re energize the drive If the fau...

Page 361: ...al BX Loose connection or disconnection of the relay electromagnetic contactor and brake Examine the relay electromagnetic contactor and brake Note Detected if the status that there is no response from the sequence circuit reaches the detection time set in S1 19 Sequence Fault SE4 Detect Time Do a Fault Reset to clear the fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions SvE Zero Servo Fault The value set...

Page 362: ...t Fault trace is not available for this fault Code Name Causes Possible Solutions Uv2 Control Power Undervoltage A drive hardware problem occurred Re energize the drive and check if the fault still remains Replace the control board or the entire drive if the fault continues Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for instructions on replacing the control board Note Detected if the con...

Page 363: ...mmunications between the smart device and keypad Make sure that no device around the keypad uses the same radio bandwidth 2400 MHz to 2480 MHz and prevent radio interference Note The drive detects this error when operating the drive with a smart device using the Bluetooth LCD keypad If the drive detects this error the terminal assigned to H2 01 to H2 05 10 MFDO Function Select Alarm will be ON Use...

Page 364: ...ontrol circuit lines main circuit lines and ground wiring and decrease the effects of electrical interference Make sure that a magnetic contactor is not the source of the electrical interference then use a Surge Protective Device if necessary Use only recommended cables or other shielded line Ground the shield on the controller side or the drive input power side Separate all communication wiring f...

Page 365: ...n level settings are incorrect Adjust F1 10 Speed Deviation Detection Level and F1 11 Speed Deviation Detect DelayTime The load is locked up Examine the machine The holding brake is stopping the motor Release the holding brake Note Detected if the deviation between the detected speed and the speed reference is greater than the setting in F1 10 for longer than F1 11 If the drive detects this error ...

Page 366: ...ternal device 1 Find the device that caused the external fault and remove the cause 2 Clear the external fault input in the MFDI The wiring is incorrect Correctly connect the signal line to MFDI terminal S4 External fault H1 04 2C to 2F is set to MFDI terminal S4 but the terminal is not in use Correctly set the MFDI Note If the drive detects this error the terminal assigned to H2 01 to H2 05 10 MF...

Page 367: ...pply The voltage of the main circuit power supply decreased and the 24 V power supply is supplying power to the drive Examine the main circuit power supply Turn ON the main circuit power supply to run the drive Note Set o2 26 Ext Power 24V Supply Display to enable or disable EP24v detection The drive will not output an alarm signal for this alarm Code Name Causes Possible Solutions FAn Internal Fa...

Page 368: ...peration Time Setting 0 h to reset the cooling fan operation time Note When the estimated performance life is expired the terminal assigned to H2 01 to H2 05 2F MFDO Function Select Maintenance Notification will be ON Code Name Causes Possible Solutions LT 2 Capacitor Maintenance Time The capacitors for the main circuit and control circuit are at 90 of expected performance life Replace the control...

Page 369: ...attern for Motor 2 settings Decrease the values set in E3 08 Motor 2 Mid Point A Voltage and E3 10 Motor 2 Minimum Output Voltage For motor 3 adjust E7 xx V f Pattern for Motor 3 settings Decrease the values set in E7 08 Motor 3 Mid Point A Voltage and E7 10 Motor 3 Minimum Output Voltage Note If Ex 08 and Ex 10 are set too low the overload tolerance will decrease at low speeds Note The drive dete...

Page 370: ...s fault in F1 03 Operation Select at Overspeed Code Name Causes Possible Solutions ov DC Bus Overvoltage There are surge voltages in the input power supply Connect a DC reactor to the drive Note If you turn the phase advancing capacitors ON and OFF and use thyristor converters in the same power supply system there can be surge voltages that irregularly increase the input voltage The drive output c...

Page 371: ...minal assigned to H1 xx 33 34 MFDI Function Select Rev Limit rEvL Reverse Travel Limit N C is input the Run command has been disabled Turn OFF the Travel Limit to input the Forward run command Note If the drive detects this error the terminal assigned to H2 01 to H2 05 10 MFDO Function Select Alarm will be ON Code Name Causes Possible Solutions rUn Motor Switch during Run The drive received a Moto...

Page 372: ...here is loose wiring in the drive input power terminals Tighten the terminal screws to the correct tightening torque There was a loss of power Improve the power supply The main circuit capacitors have become unserviceable Examine the capacitor maintenance time in monitor U4 05 CapacitorMaintenance If U4 05 is more than 90 replace the control board or the drive For information about replacing the c...

Page 373: ...rrectly The settings for MFDI overlap Note H1 xx 20 to 2F External Fault and Reserved are excluded Set the parameters correctly so that the functions assigned to MFDI do not overlap H1 xx 2 MFDI Function Select External Reference 1 2 Selection When xx is set these parameters are set at the same time while S1 20 1 Operation in Reverse Regen operation in reverse H1 xx 38 Counterweight Selection Set ...

Page 374: ...en set but an option card is not connected to the drive Connect an option card to the drive The following parameters are set at the same time F3 01 6 Digital Input Function Selection BCD 5 digit 0 01 Hz F3 03 0 1 DI Data Length Selection 8bit 12bit Set F3 03 2 16bit The following parameters have been set while the AI A3 option card is installed H1 xx 2 External Reference 1 2 Selection b1 15 3 Freq...

Page 375: ...s are not in the applicable setting range Set C6 02 to C6 05 correctly Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oPE18 Online Tuning Param Setting Err The parameters that control online tuning are set incorrectly In OLV control one of these parameters was set when n6 01 2 Online Tuning Selection Voltage Correction Tuning E2 02 Motor Rated Slip is set to 30 of the default setting or lower E2 06 Motor Lea...

Page 376: ...settings that are not in use Code Name Causes Possible Solutions oPE25 Parameter Setting Error The crane sequence parameter frequency setting error for motor 2 and motor 3 Set the parameters correctly When S1 26 0 Motor2 Brake Delay Time 0 00 s set in these ways S1 23 or S1 24 S1 25 Motor2 Brake Release Freq Motor2 Brake Delay Frequency S1 25 E3 06 Motor2 Brake Delay Frequency Motor 2 Base Frequen...

Page 377: ...t value is incorrect Do Auto Tuning again and set the correct rated current shown on the motor nameplate Code Name Causes Possible Solutions End4 Adjusted Slip Calculation Error The Auto Tuning results were not in the applicable parameter setting range The motor rated slip that was measured after Stationary Auto Tuning was 0 2 Hz or lower The motor rated slip that was measured after compensation w...

Page 378: ... the motor and do Rotational Auto Tuning again The motor nameplate data entered during Auto Tuning is incorrect Make sure that the input motor nameplate data is correct Do Auto Tuning again and correctly set the motor nameplate data Code Name Causes Possible Solutions Er 05 No Load Current Error The Auto Tuning results were not in the applicable parameter setting range Auto Tuning did not complete...

Page 379: ...s too low Check the motor wiring for any short circuits between the wires Check and turn ON any magnetic contactors used between motors Replace the control board or the drive For information about replacing the control board contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative You tried Auto Tuning without a motor connected to the drive Connect the motor and do Auto Tuning There was a current dete...

Page 380: ...de Name Causes Possible Solutions Er 17 Reverse Prohibited Error b1 04 1 Reverse Operation Selection Reverse Disabled Note You cannot do Inertia Tuning if the drive cannot rotate the motor in reverse 1 Enable reverse in the target machine 2 Set b1 04 0 Reverse Enabled 3 Do Inertia Tuning again ...

Page 381: ...the drive to the same value that is on the keypad 2 Restore the parameters Code Name Causes Possible Solutions CPyE Error Writing Data Parameter restore did not end correctly Restore the parameters Code Name Causes Possible Solutions CSEr Control Mode Mismatch The keypad is broken Replace the keypad Code Name Causes Possible Solutions dFPS Drive Model Mismatch You tried to restore parameters to a ...

Page 382: ...ize the drive remove the cause of the fault and reset Fault Occurs Without Power Loss 1 Examine the fault code shown on the keypad 2 Use the information in the Troubleshooting tables to remove the fault 3 Do a fault reset Fault Reset Procedure If a fault occurs you must remove the cause of the fault and re energize the drive The table below lists the different methods to reset the drive after a fa...

Page 383: ...nformation about how to examine and maintain drives in use how to replace cooling fans and other parts and how to store drives 7 1 Section Safety 384 7 2 Inspection 386 7 3 Maintenance 388 7 4 Replace Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans 389 7 5 Replace the Drive 414 7 6 Replace the Keypad Battery 419 7 7 Storage Guidelines 421 ...

Page 384: ...injury or death if you touch the motor case Only let approved personnel install wire maintain examine replace parts and repair the drive If personnel are not approved it can cause serious injury or death Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry when you do work on the drive Tighten loose clothing and remove all metal objects for example watches or rings Loose clothing can catch on the drive and jewel...

Page 385: ... the fans replace all the fans to increase product life If you install the fans incorrectly it can cause damage to the drive Make sure that all connections are correct after you install the drive and connect peripheral devices Incorrect connections can cause damage to the drive Do not energize and de energize the drive more frequently than one time each 30 minutes If you frequently energize and de...

Page 386: ...ration Check for a load that is too heavy Tighten loose screws Check for a dirty heatsink or motor Measure the ambient temperature Examine the cooling fans circulation fans and circuit board cooling fans Check for a clogged or dirty fan Use the performance life monitor to check for correct fan operation Surrounding Environment Make sure that the installation environment is applicable Remove the so...

Page 387: ... Action Checked Operation Check Check for increased vibration or unusual noise Stop the motor and contact approved maintenance personnel as necessary Table 7 4 Control Circuit Periodic Inspection Checklist Inspection Area Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked General Examine terminals for stripped damaged or loose connections Tighten loose screws Tighten loose screws Replace damaged screws o...

Page 388: ...f the estimated performance life is approaching The Maintenance Monitors prevent the need to shut down the full system for unexpected problems Users can set alarm notifications for the maintenance periods for these drive components Cooling fan Electrolytic Capacitor Soft charge bypass relay IGBT Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative for more information about part replacement ...

Page 389: ... Cooling Fans Replacement Procedure 4002 to 4005 4006 to 4009 1 Procedure A 4015 4018 2 Procedure B 4024 4031 2 Procedure C 4039 to 4060 2 Procedure D 4075 to 4260 2 Procedure E 4304 2 1 Procedure F 4371 3 1 Procedure F 4414 to 4605 2 1 2 Procedure G Fan Replacement Procedure A DANGER Electrical Shock Hazard Do not examine connect or disconnect wiring on an energized drive Before servicing disconn...

Page 390: ...des of it and pull up A Fan finger guard Figure 7 1 Remove the Fan Finger Guard 2 Pull the cooling fan straight up from the drive Disconnect the relay connector and remove the fan from the drive A Cooling fan Figure 7 2 Remove the Cooling Fan Fan Installation Reverse the removal procedure for fan installation 1 Connect the relay connector between the drive and cooling fan Figure 7 3 Connect the Re...

Page 391: ... Do not examine connect or disconnect wiring on an energized drive Before servicing disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum The internal capacitor stays charged after the drive is de energized The charge indicator LED extinguishes when the DC bus voltage decreases below 50 Vdc When all indicators are OFF remove the covers before measu...

Page 392: ...er guard and pull up A Fan finger guard Figure 7 7 Remove the Fan Finger Guard 2 Pull the cooling fans straight up from the drive Disconnect the relay connectors and remove the fans from the drive A Cooling fans Figure 7 8 Remove the Cooling Fans Fan Installation Reverse the removal procedure for fan installation 1 Connect the relay connectors between the drive and cooling fans Figure 7 9 Connect ...

Page 393: ... on drive C Front of drive Figure 7 10 Install the Cooling Fans 3 Put the cables in the recess of the drive A Front of drive B Space for cables 1 Figure 7 11 Put the Cables and Connectors in the Drive Recess 1 Make sure that the cables and connectors are in the correct space 4 Hold the fan finger guard at an angle and put the connector tabs on the fan finger guard into the holes on the drive A Fro...

Page 394: ...voltages to make sure that the drive is safe If you do work on the drive when it is energized it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock CAUTION Burn Hazard Do not touch a hot drive heatsink De energize the drive wait for a minimum of 15 minutes then make sure that the heatsink is cool before you replace the cooling fans If you touch a hot drive heatsink it can burn you NOTICE Use...

Page 395: ...in the drive A Notch on fan B Alignment pins on drive C Front of drive Figure 7 17 Install the Cooling Fans 3 Put the cables and connectors in the recess of the drive A Front of drive B Space for cables 1 Figure 7 18 Put the Cables and Connectors in the Drive Recess 1 Make sure that the cables and connectors are in the correct space 4 Insert the fan finger guard straight until the hooks click into...

Page 396: ...d Do not touch a hot drive heatsink De energize the drive wait for a minimum of 15 minutes then make sure that the heatsink is cool before you replace the cooling fans If you touch a hot drive heatsink it can burn you NOTICE Use the instructions in this manual to replace the cooling fans When you do maintenance on the fans replace all the fans to increase product life If you install the fans incor...

Page 397: ...Figure 7 23 Install the Cooling Fans 3 Put the cables and connectors in the recess of the drive A Front of drive B Space for cables 1 Figure 7 24 Put the Cables and Connectors in the Drive Recess 1 Make sure that the cables and connectors are in the correct space 4 Push the hooks on the left and right sides of the fan finger guard and click it into place on the drive Figure 7 25 Reattach the Fan F...

Page 398: ...h a hot drive heatsink De energize the drive wait for a minimum of 15 minutes then make sure that the heatsink is cool before you replace the cooling fans If you touch a hot drive heatsink it can burn you NOTICE Use the instructions in this manual to replace the cooling fans When you do maintenance on the fans replace all the fans to increase product life If you install the fans incorrectly it can...

Page 399: ...ve C Front of drive Figure 7 29 Install the Cooling Fans 3 Put the cables and connectors in the recess of the drive A Front of drive B Space for cables 1 Figure 7 30 Put the Cables and Connectors in the Drive Recess 1 Make sure that the cables and connectors are in the correct space 4 Hold the fan finger guard at an angle and put the connector tabs on the fan finger guard into the holes on the dri...

Page 400: ... the drive is safe If you do work on the drive when it is energized it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock CAUTION Burn Hazard Do not touch a hot drive heatsink De energize the drive wait for a minimum of 15 minutes then make sure that the heatsink is cool before you replace the cooling fans If you touch a hot drive heatsink it can burn you NOTICE Use the instructions in this ...

Page 401: ...Notch on fan B Alignment pins on drive C Front of drive Figure 7 36 Install the Cooling Fans 3 Put the cables and connectors in the recess of the drive A Front of drive B Space for cables 1 Figure 7 37 Put the Cables and Connectors in the Drive Recess 1 Make sure that the cables and connectors are in the correct space 4 Hold the fan finger guards at an angle and put the connector tabs on the fan f...

Page 402: ... the fan finger guards and click them into place on the drive Figure 7 39 Reattach the Fan Finger Guards 6 Energize the drive and set o4 03 0 Fan Operation Time Setting 0 h to reset the fan operation time Circulation Fan Removal Remove the drive cover before you start this procedure CAUTION Crush Hazard Loosen the cover screws Do not fully remove them If you fully remove the cover screws the termi...

Page 403: ...from the clamps A Fan unit B Clamps C Fan cable Figure 7 40 Remove the Fan Cable 2 Loosen the screws that safety the fan unit and slide the fan unit to the right Note To remove the fan unit it is only necessary to loosen the screws A Fan unit B Screws Figure 7 41 Slide the Fan Unit 3 Disconnect the relay connector and remove the fan unit Figure 7 42 Remove the Fan Unit ...

Page 404: ...on 1 Connect the relay connector between the drive and circulation fan A Circulation Fan B Fan unit base Figure 7 44 Connect the Relay Connectors 2 Align the pins on the fan unit base with the notches on the fans and put the fans in the fan unit base then use the screws to safety them Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in A Circulation F...

Page 405: ...through the Clamps 6 Install the drive cover 7 Energize the drive and set o4 03 0 Fan Operation Time Setting 0 h to reset the fan operation time Fan Replacement Procedure G DANGER Electrical Shock Hazard Do not examine connect or disconnect wiring on an energized drive Before servicing disconnect all power to the equipment and wait for the time specified on the warning label at a minimum The inter...

Page 406: ...se product life If you install the fans incorrectly it can cause damage to the drive Fan Removal 1 Remove the drive cover CAUTION Crush Hazard Loosen the cover screws Do not fully remove them If you fully remove the cover screws the terminal cover can fall and cause moderate injury 2 Unplug the fan cable from the fan connectors A Fan unit B Fan connectors C Fan cable Figure 7 49 Remove the Fan Cab...

Page 407: ...the slide panel at the same time Figure 7 51 Remove the Fan Unit 5 Unplug the relay connectors remove the screws that safety the cooling fans and circulation fan and then remove the fans A Cooling fans B Relay connectors C Fan unit base D Circulation fan Figure 7 52 Remove the Cooling Fans and Circulation Fan Fan Installation Reverse the removal procedure for fan installation ...

Page 408: ...unit base with the notches on the fans and put the fans in the fan unit base then use the screws to safety them Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in Note Make sure that you do not pinch cables between the fans and the fan unit base A Cooling fans B Fan unit base C Alignment pin on fan unit base D Circulation fan E Notch on fan Figure 7 ...

Page 409: ...lation fan Figure 7 55 Put the Cables and Connectors in the Drive Recess 4 Put the fan unit into the specified location Figure 7 56 Install the Fan Unit 5 Slide the fan unit to the right and use the screws to safety it to the drive Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque Screws in Position A 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in Screws in Position B 1 96 N m to 2 53 N m 17 35 ...

Page 410: ...t B Fan connectors C Fan cable Figure 7 58 Connect Cooling Fan Connectors 7 Install the drive cover 8 Energize the drive and set o4 03 0 Fan Operation Time Setting 0 h to reset the fan operation time Circuit Board Cooling Fan Removal Remove the drive cover before you start this procedure CAUTION Crush Hazard Loosen the cover screws Do not fully remove them If you fully remove the cover screws the ...

Page 411: ...les from the fan connectors A Fan connectors B Fan cables C Circuit board cooling fan units Figure 7 59 Unplug the Fan Cables 2 Loosen the screws that safety the circuit board cooling fan unit and slide the circuit board cooling fan unit up Note To remove the fan unit it is only necessary to loosen the screws A Screws Figure 7 60 Slide the Circuit Board Cooling Fan Units ...

Page 412: ...th the notch on the fan and put the circuit board cooling fan in the fan unit then use the screws to safety the circuit board cooling fan to the fan unit base Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque 0 98 N m to 1 33 N m 8 67 lbf in to 11 77 lbf in Note Make sure that you do not pinch cables between the circuit board cooling fan and the fan unit base A Circuit board cooling fan B Fan unit...

Page 413: ...ual 413 Figure 7 64 Install the Circuit Board Cooling Fan Unit 3 Connect the fan cable to the fan connectors A Fan connectors B Fan cable C Circuit board cooling fan units Figure 7 65 Fan Connect Cooling Fan Connectors 4 Install the drive cover 5 Energize the drive and set o4 03 0 Fan Operation Time Setting 0 h to reset the fan operation time ...

Page 414: ...do work on the drive when it is energized it will cause serious injury or death from electrical shock NOTICE Damage to Equipment When you touch the drive and circuit boards make sure that you observe correct electrostatic discharge ESD procedures If you do not follow procedures it can cause ESD damage to the drive circuitry Notes on Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal Block Use copper wire Do not use...

Page 415: ...e the correct section of the wiring cover to make wiring easier Regularly tighten loose terminal block screws to their specified tightening torques Do not let strain on the wiring cause damage Use a strain relief near the wiring to release the tension Refer to Figure 7 69 for an example A Strain relief Figure 7 69 Strain Relief Example Table 7 9 Recommended Wiring Tools Screw Size Screw Shape Adap...

Page 416: ...the correct tools for the wire gauge 2 Use 6 35 mm 0 25 in bit socket holder 3 Use a torque wrench that can apply this torque measurement range Remove the Control Circuit Terminal Block Remove the keypad and the drive front cover before doing these steps 1 Loosen the screws on the control circuit terminal block Figure 7 70 Loosen the Screws 2 Slide the wired control circuit terminal block down and...

Page 417: ...n that you wired and use a nipper as shown in Figure 7 76 to clip the specified cutaway section of the wiring cover A Cutaway sections B Clip here with nippers Figure 7 76 Clip the Cutaway Section of the Wiring Cover Note Different drive models have different wiring cover shapes Only clip the section of the wiring cover that applies to the wired terminal If you clip areas that do not apply to wire...

Page 418: ... 7 78 Put the Terminal Block into the Connector 2 Use M3 screws to safety the terminal block Tighten the screws to a correct tightening torque M3 screws 0 5 N m to 0 6 N m 4 4 lbf in to 5 3 lbf in Figure 7 79 Safety the Terminal Block 3 Install the front cover and the keypad to their initial positions 4 Check o2 04 Drive Model KVA Selection Note When you save parameter information in a keypad that...

Page 419: ...e a fire NOTICE Damage to Equipment The keypad battery stays in use after you de energize the drive When you will keep the drive de energized for long periods of time remove the battery from the keypad When the expected life of the battery is complete replace the battery immediately A dead battery in the keypad can leak and cause damage to the keypad and drive The performance life estimate of a ne...

Page 420: ...EPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual A Battery Figure 7 81 Insert the New Battery 5 Put the battery cover on the keypad and use a slotted screwdriver to turn the battery cover clockwise to close it 6 Install the keypad on the drive ...

Page 421: ...osive Gas Do not keep the drive in locations with corrosive gas For example chemical plants refineries and sewage plants Salt Damage Do not keep the drive in salty locations For example locations near the ocean and salt damage designated locations Do not keep the drive in unsatisfactory locations Keep all drives in storage rooms that are safe from unsatisfactory elements Regular Application of Pow...

Page 422: ...7 7 Storage Guidelines 422 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual ...

Page 423: ...YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual 423 8 Disposal 8 1 Section Safety 424 8 2 Disposal Instructions 425 ...

Page 424: ...or disassemble the keypad If the battery explodes it can cause a fire Do not disassemble batteries Do not expose batteries to heat or fire If the battery explodes it can cause a fire Crush Hazard Wear eye protection when you do work on the drive If you do not use correct safety equipment it can cause serious injury or death Only approved personnel can operate a crane or hoist to move the drive If ...

Page 425: ...uct Note Remove the battery and microSD card from the keypad before you discard the drive You cannot recycle the battery Discard used batteries as specified by the battery manufacturer Customers are responsible for microSD card data protection PC functions that format and delete the data may not be sufficient to fully erase the microSD card data Yaskawa recommends that customers physically destroy...

Page 426: ...8 2 Disposal Instructions 426 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual ...

Page 427: ...9 1 Section Safety 428 9 2 Model Specifications 200 V Class 429 9 3 Model Specifications 400 V Class 431 9 4 Drive Specifications 434 9 5 Drive Derating 437 9 6 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions 439 9 7 Knock out Hole Dimensions UL Type 1 457 9 8 Peripheral Devices and Options 461 ...

Page 428: ...ive CR700 Technical Manual 9 1 Section Safety DANGER Do not ignore the safety messages in this manual If you ignore the safety messages in this manual it will cause serious injury or death The manufacturer is not responsible for injuries or damage to equipment ...

Page 429: ...pen Loop Vector 590 Hz Measures for Harmonics DC reactor External options Braking Device Braking Transistor Standard internal characteristics EMC Filter EMC Filter IEC61800 3 C3 Factory option Models 2xxxB There is a category C3 EMC filter in the drive Power Supply Rated Voltage Rated Frequency Three phase AC power supply 200 V to 240 Vat 50 60 Hz DC power supply 270 V to 340 V Permitted Voltage F...

Page 430: ... reactor Standard internal characteristics Braking Device Braking Transistor Standard internal characteristics External options EMC Filter EMC Filter IEC61800 3 C3 Factory option Models 2xxxB There is a category C3 EMC filter in the drive Power Supply Rated Voltage Rated Frequency Three phase AC power supply 200 V to 240 Vat 50 60 Hz DC power supply 270 V to 340 V Permitted Voltage Fluctuation 15 ...

Page 431: ...easures for Harmonics DC reactor External options Braking Device Braking Transistor Standard internal characteristics EMC Filter EMC Filter IEC61800 3 C3 Factory option Models 4xxxB There is a category C3 EMC filter in the drive Power Supply Rated Voltage Rated Frequency Three phase AC power supply 380 V to 480 Vat 50 60 Hz DC power supply 513 V to 679 V Permitted Voltage Fluctuation 15 to 10 Perm...

Page 432: ...The maximum applicable motor output complies with 380 V motor ratings as specified in Annex G of IEC 60947 4 1 The rated output current of the drive output amps must be equal to or more than the motor rated current 2 Assumes the value at the rated output current The input current rating changes when the power supply transformer input reactor wiring connections or power supply impedance change 3 Th...

Page 433: ...370 465 1 The maximum applicable motor output complies with 380 V motor ratings as specified in Annex G of IEC 60947 4 1 The rated output current of the drive output amps must be equal to or more than the motor rated current 2 Assumes the value at the rated output current The input current rating changes when the power supply transformer input reactor wiring connections or power supply impedance c...

Page 434: ...ts in Open Loop Vector Control OLV Closed Loop Vector Control CLV and Advanced Open Loop Vector Control AOLV Accel Decel Time 0 0 s to 6000 0 s The drive allows four selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings Braking Torque Approx 20 Approx 125 with a dynamic braking option Short time average deceleration torque Motor output 0 4 0 75 kW over 100 Motor output 1 5 ...

Page 435: ...chassis type IP20 10 C to 50 C 14 F to 122 F Enclosed wall mounted type UL Type 1 10 C to 40 C 14 F to 104 F Do not use the drive in a location where the temperature changes suddenly to improve the drive reliability When installing the drive in an enclosure use a cooling fan or air conditioner to keep the internal air temperature in the permitted range Do not let the drive freeze Derate the output...

Page 436: ...tandard UL61800 5 1 EN61800 3 IEC EN61800 5 1 Two Safe Disable inputs and one EDM output according to ISO EN13849 1 Cat III PLe IEC EN61508 SIL3 Protection Design Open chassis type IP20 Enclosed wall mounted type UL Type 1 Note Installing UL Type 1 kit on an open chassis type IP20 drive to convert the drive to a wall mount enclosure UL Type 1 ...

Page 437: ...4 0 12 6 10 8 9 1 2018 17 5 17 5 17 5 16 1 14 3 12 6 2025 25 0 25 0 25 0 23 0 20 5 18 0 2033 33 0 33 0 33 0 29 3 24 8 20 2 2047 47 0 47 0 47 0 43 4 38 9 34 4 2060 60 0 60 0 60 0 56 0 51 0 46 2075 75 0 75 0 75 0 68 6 60 5 53 2088 88 0 88 0 88 0 80 5 71 0 62 2115 115 0 115 0 115 0 105 1 92 8 81 2145 145 0 145 0 125 2 112 0 2180 180 0 180 0 155 2 138 6 2215 215 0 215 0 184 8 164 7 2283 283 0 283 0 24...

Page 438: ...24 8 4453 453 0 378 3 4605 605 0 505 2 Altitude Derating Install the drive in a location that has an altitude of 1000 m 3281 ft or lower Derate the output current by 1 for each 100 m 328 ft to install the drive in altitudes between 1000 to 4000 m 3281 to 13123 ft It is not necessary to derate the rated voltage in these conditions Installing the drive at 2000 m 6562 ft or lower Installing the drive...

Page 439: ... document are for drives with hardware revision D or later For estimated weights of drives with hardware revision C or earlier contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative The REV column on the nameplate on the right side of the drive identifies the hardware revision Refer to Nameplate on page 22 for more information IP20 UL Open Type Figure 9 1 Dimension Diagram 1 Figure 9 2 Dimension Dia...

Page 440: ...9 6 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions 440 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual Figure 9 3 Dimension Diagram 3 Figure 9 4 Dimension Diagram 4 ...

Page 441: ...Specifications 9 9 6 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual 441 Figure 9 5 Dimension Diagram 5 Figure 9 6 Dimension Diagram 6 ...

Page 442: ...9 6 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions 442 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual Figure 9 7 Dimension Diagram 7 Figure 9 8 Dimension Diagram 8 ...

Page 443: ... 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 3 5 7 72 2014 140 5 51 260 10 24 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 248 9 76 6 0 24 1 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 3 8 8 38 2018 140 5 51 260 10 24 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 248 9 76 6 0 24 1 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 3 8 8 38 2025 140 5 51 260 10 24 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 248 9 76 6 0 24 1 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 4 2 9 26 2033 140 5 51 260 10 24 211 8 31 138 ...

Page 444: ... 18 4 5 0 18 M12 106 233 7 3 Table 9 13 200 V Class IP20 UL Open Type with Internal EMC Filter Mode l Exte rior and Mount ing Dime nsion s Dimensions mm in Est Weig ht kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 Maxi mum H1 H2 H3 H4 t1 t2 d 2003 Figure 9 1 140 5 51 260 10 24 176 6 93 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 248 9 76 6 0 24 1 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 3 5 7 72 2005 140 5 51 260 10 24 176 6 93 138 5 43 38 1 ...

Page 445: ... 1 10 44 1 73 30 1 18 4 5 0 18 4 5 0 18 M12 112 246 9 6 Table 9 14 400 V Class IP20 UL Open Type No Internal EMC Filter Mode l Exte rior and Moun ting Dime nsion s Dimensions mm in Est Weig ht kg lb W H D D1 D2 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 Maxi mum H1 H2 H3 H4 t1 t2 d 4002 Figure 9 1 140 5 51 260 10 24 176 6 93 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 248 9 76 6 0 24 1 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 3 4 7 50 4003 140 5 51 260 10 2...

Page 446: ...0 6 30 218 8 58 218 8 58 18 0 709 659 25 94 28 1 10 43 5 1 71 28 5 1 12 4 5 0 18 4 5 0 18 M10 60 132 3 0 4216 312 12 28 700 27 56 420 16 54 260 10 24 160 6 30 218 8 58 218 8 58 18 0 709 659 25 94 28 1 10 43 5 1 71 28 5 1 12 4 5 0 18 4 5 0 18 M10 62 136 7 1 4260 312 12 28 700 27 56 420 16 54 260 10 24 160 6 30 218 8 58 218 8 58 18 0 709 659 25 94 28 1 10 43 5 1 71 28 5 1 12 4 5 0 18 4 5 0 18 M10 65...

Page 447: ...5 51 87 3 43 192 7 56 192 7 56 335 13 19 8 0 32 2 3 0 09 2 3 0 09 M6 8 17 64 4045 220 8 66 350 13 78 246 9 69 140 5 51 106 4 17 192 7 56 192 7 56 335 13 19 8 0 32 2 3 0 09 2 3 0 09 M6 13 28 67 4060 Figure 9 4 240 9 45 400 15 75 280 11 02 166 6 54 114 4 49 195 7 68 186 7 32 12 0 47 375 14 76 17 5 0 69 17 5 0 69 2 3 0 09 2 3 0 09 M6 15 33 08 4075 Figure 9 5 255 10 04 450 17 72 280 11 02 166 6 54 114...

Page 448: ... 17 72 450 17 72 225 8 86 225 8 86 20 0 787 1093 43 03 25 5 1 00 43 5 1 71 30 5 1 20 4 5 0 18 4 5 0 18 M12 198 436 5 4453 510 20 08 1136 44 72 480 18 90 260 10 24 220 8 66 450 17 72 450 17 72 225 8 86 225 8 86 20 0 787 1093 43 03 25 5 1 00 43 5 1 71 30 5 1 20 4 5 0 18 4 5 0 18 M12 198 436 5 4605 510 20 08 1136 44 72 480 18 90 260 10 24 220 8 66 450 17 72 450 17 72 225 8 86 225 8 86 20 0 787 1093 4...

Page 449: ...Specifications 9 9 6 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual 449 Figure 9 11 Dimension Diagram 2 Figure 9 12 Dimension Diagram 3 ...

Page 450: ...9 6 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions 450 YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual Figure 9 13 Dimension Diagram 4 Figure 9 14 Dimension Diagram 5 ...

Page 451: ...Specifications 9 9 6 Drive Exterior and Mounting Dimensions YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual 451 Figure 9 15 Dimension Diagram 6 Figure 9 16 Dimension Diagram 7 ...

Page 452: ...0 24 40 1 57 1 5 0 06 1 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 4 1 9 04 2014 140 5 51 300 11 81 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 24 40 1 57 1 5 0 06 1 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 4 4 9 70 2018 140 5 51 300 11 81 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 24 40 1 57 1 5 0 06 1 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 4 4 9 70 2025 140 5 51 300 11 81 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 ...

Page 453: ...1 W2 W3 Maxi mum H0 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 t1 t2 d 2003 Figure 9 10 140 5 51 300 11 81 176 6 93 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 24 40 1 57 1 5 0 06 1 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 4 1 9 04 2005 140 5 51 300 11 81 176 6 93 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 24 40 1 57 1 5 0 06 1 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 4 1 9 04 2008 140 5 51 300 11 81 176 6 93 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02...

Page 454: ... 8 82 4005 140 5 51 300 11 81 176 6 93 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 24 40 1 57 1 5 0 06 1 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 4 0 8 82 4006 140 5 51 300 11 81 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 24 40 1 57 1 5 0 06 1 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 4 3 9 48 4007 140 5 51 300 11 81 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 24 40 1 57 1 5 0 06 1 6 0...

Page 455: ...M5 4 0 8 82 4005 140 5 51 300 11 81 176 6 93 138 5 43 38 1 50 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 24 40 1 57 1 5 0 06 1 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 4 0 8 82 4006 140 5 51 300 11 81 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 24 40 1 57 1 5 0 06 1 6 0 06 5 0 20 M5 4 3 9 48 4007 140 5 51 300 11 81 211 8 31 138 5 43 73 2 87 102 4 02 102 4 02 260 10 24 248 9 76 6 0 24 40 1 57 1 5 0 06...

Page 456: ...0 69 157 6 18 20 5 0 81 2 3 0 09 2 3 0 09 M8 43 94 82 4180 Figure 9 16 316 12 44 915 36 02 420 16 54 260 10 24 160 6 30 218 8 58 218 8 58 16 0 63 700 27 56 659 25 94 28 1 10 215 8 46 28 5 1 12 4 5 0 18 4 5 0 18 M10 66 145 5 3 4216 316 12 44 915 36 02 420 16 54 260 10 24 160 6 30 218 8 58 218 8 58 16 0 63 700 27 56 659 25 94 28 1 10 215 8 46 28 5 1 12 4 5 0 18 4 5 0 18 M10 68 149 9 4 4260 316 12 44...

Page 457: ...al Manual 457 9 7 Knock out Hole Dimensions UL Type 1 Figure 9 18 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Diagram 1 Models 2003 to 2033 and 4002 to 4018 Figure 9 19 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Diagram 2 Models 2047 4024 and 4031 Figure 9 20 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Diagram 3 Models 2060 2075 4039 and 4045 ...

Page 458: ...AWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual Figure 9 21 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Diagram 4 Models 2088 and 4060 Figure 9 22 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Diagram 5 Models 2115 4075 and 4091 Figure 9 23 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Diagram 6 Models 2145 4112 and 4150 ...

Page 459: ...am 8 Models 2215 2283 4180 4216 and 4260 Figure 9 26 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Diagram 9 Models 2346 and 4304 Model Diagram Dimensions mm in D D1 D2 D3 W W1 W2 φd4 φd5 φd6 2003 to 2011 4002 to 4005 Figure 9 18 39 1 54 85 3 35 57 5 2 26 30 1 18 38 2 1 50 35 1 38 2014 to 2033 4006 to 4018 74 2 91 85 3 35 57 5 2 26 30 1 18 38 2 1 50 35 1 38 2047 4024 4031 Figure 9 19 67 5 2 66 86 5 3 41 60 2 3...

Page 460: ...2 5 4 43 96 3 78 48 5 1 91 73 2 87 38 1 50 35 1 38 50 1 97 2115 4075 4091 Figure 9 22 112 4 4 43 112 8 4 44 55 8 2 20 73 5 2 89 35 1 38 35 1 38 62 2 44 2145 4112 4150 Figure 9 23 149 5 87 117 4 61 56 2 20 78 3 07 37 5 1 48 44 1 73 35 1 38 62 2 44 2180 Figure 9 24 149 5 87 124 8 4 91 117 3 4 62 61 8 2 43 96 3 78 61 5 2 42 50 1 97 35 1 38 75 2 95 2215 2283 4180 4216 4260 Figure 9 25 160 6 30 208 4 8...

Page 461: ... can use a molded case circuit breaker as a replacement for an ELCB that is upstream in the power supply system When you use a high frequency ELCB at the power input side of the drive make sure that each drive has a minimum cumulative sensitivity amperage of 30 mA Input Side Magnetic Contactor MC SC series To prevent burn damage when connecting a braking resistor This option fully opens the circui...

Page 462: ...he heatsink for the braking unit outside of the control panel Table 9 24 Engineering Tools Name Model Purpose To use a PC to set drives and manage parameters To use a PC to do advanced drive programming Table 9 25 Option PCB Name Model Purpose Document No Complementary Type PG PG B3 This option is for use with CLV control and CL V f control The drive detects motor rotation speed from the pulse gen...

Page 463: ... drive Set and view parameters Monitor output frequency output current and other statuses 1 DeviceNet SI N3 This option uses the host controller over DeviceNet communication to Operate and stop the drive Set and view parameters Monitor output frequency output current and other statuses Note The drive is compatible with option software versions 1114 and later 1 CANopen SI S3 This option uses the ho...

Page 464: ...5 C 1 AO A3 DO A3 CN5 A B and C 1 AI A3 3 DI A3 3 SI C3 SI EM3 SI EN3 SI EP3 SI ET3 SI N3 SI P3 SI S3 SI T3 CN5 A 1 1 To connect only one PG option card use the CN5 C connector To connect two PG option cards use the CN5 C and CN5 B connectors 2 If you use the motor switching function you cannot use this option 3 To use AI A3 and DI A3 input statuses as monitors connect the option cards to one of C...

Page 465: ...87 10 10 H Terminal Functions 499 10 11 L Protection Functions 515 10 12 n Special Adjustment 521 10 13 o Keypad Related Settings 524 10 14 S Crane Parameters 530 10 15 T Motor Tuning 537 10 16 U Monitors 539 10 17 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with A1 02 Control Method Selection 551 10 18 Parameters that Change from the Default Settings with E3 01 Motor 2 Control Mode Selection...

Page 466: ...ive CR700 Technical Manual 10 1 Section Safety DANGER Do not ignore the safety messages in this manual If you ignore the safety messages in this manual it will cause serious injury or death The manufacturer is not responsible for injuries or damage to equipment ...

Page 467: ...g the drive with Open Loop Vector Control The parameter is available when operating the drive with Closed Loop Vector Control The parameter is available when operating the drive with Advanced Open Loop Vector Control Hex Hexadecimal numbers that represent MEMOBUS addresses to change parameters over network communication RUN You can change the parameter setting during drive operation Expert The par...

Page 468: ... Input Option F4 Analog Output Option F5 Digital Output Option F6 Communication Options F7 Ethernet Options H1 Digital Inputs H2 Digital Outputs H3 Analog Inputs H4 Analog Outputs Parameters Name H5 Modbus Communication H7 Virtual Inputs Outputs L1 Motor Protection L2 Power Loss Ride Through L3 Stall Prevention L4 Speed Detection L7 Torque Limit L8 Hardware Protection L9 Drive Protection 2 n1 Hunt...

Page 469: ...rd set in A1 05 Password Setting to unlock parameters You can view parameter settings Monitors are locked Enter the password in A1 04 Password to unlock and change the settings 0000 0000 9999 571 A1 05 0105 Password Setting Set the password to lock parameters and prevent changes to parameter settings The following parameters can be changed when the user enters the correct password in A1 04 Passwor...

Page 470: ...User Parameters section of the keypad main menu shows the set parameters You can immediately access these saved parameters Note When the A1 06 Application Preset value changes the settings for A2 01 to A2 32 change Determined by A1 06 A1 00 to S xx 582 A2 33 0126 User Parameter Auto Selection Sets the automatic save feature for changes to parameters A2 17 to A2 32 User Parameters 17 to 32 0 Disabl...

Page 471: ...185 Digital Input Reading Sets the number of times that the drive reads the sequence input command to prevent malfunction because of electrical interference 0 Single Scan 1 Double Scan 1 0 1 590 b1 14 01C3 Phase Order Selection Sets the phase order for output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 This parameter can align the Forward Run command from the drive and the forward direction of the motor without ...

Page 472: ...n as a percentage of E2 03 Motor No Load Current 0 0 1000 595 b4 Timer Function No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref b4 03 0B30 Expert Terminal M1 M2 ON Delay Time Sets the delay time to activate the contact after the function set in H2 01 activates 0 ms 0 65000 ms 596 b4 04 0B31 Expert Terminal M1 M2 OFF Delay Time Sets the delay time to deactivate the contact after the function set in H2 01...

Page 473: ... 0 0 0 100 0 597 b7 02 01CB RUN Droop Control Delay Time Sets the responsiveness of Droop control Decrease this setting when drive response is slow Increase this setting when hunting or oscillation occur 0 05 s 0 03 2 00 s 598 b7 03 017E Droop Control Limit Selection Sets the Droop control limit function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 0 1 598 b9 Zero Servo No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref b9 01 0...

Page 474: ... will detect an ov Overvoltage fault When the drive detects an ov the drive shuts off the output and the motor coasts to stop To prevent motor coasting and stop the motor quickly and safely set a Fast Stop time in C1 09 2 0 s 0 0 6000 0 s 603 C1 10 0209 Accel Decel Time Setting Units Sets the setting units for C1 01 to C1 08 Accel Decel Times 1 to 4 and C1 09 Fast Stop Time 0 0 01 s 0 00 to 600 00...

Page 475: ...egen Sets the slip compensation function during regenerative operation 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Above 6Hz 2 Enabled Above C3 15 0 0 2 606 C3 05 0213 Output Voltage Limit Selection Sets the automatic reduction of motor magnetic flux when the output voltage is saturated 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 0 1 607 C3 16 0261 Expert Vout Modulation Limit Start Lvl Sets the modulation factor that starts the output volt...

Page 476: ...t for torque compensation for motor 2 when the drive receives a Reverse run command and b1 23 1 Selection REV Parameters Enabled Determined by E3 01 0 60000 ms 611 C4 15 111B RUN Torque Comp Delay Time Select 2 Sets the primary delay time constant for torque compensation that the drive uses when b1 23 0 Selection REV Parameters Disabled or b1 23 1 Enabled and the MFDI Counterweight Selection setti...

Page 477: ...Integral Time 2 Determined by A1 02 Determined by A1 02 616 C5 08 0222 ASR Integral Limit Set the upper limit of the ASR integral amount as a percentage of the rated load 400 0 400 616 C5 12 0386 Integral Operation Accel Decel Sets ASR integral operation during acceleration and deceleration 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note If A1 02 0 Control Method Selection V f you must set H6 01 3 Terminal RP Pulse Tra...

Page 478: ... the notch filter 0 Hz 0 or 2 to 100 Hz 620 C5 51 0B15 Expert Notch Filter Bandwidth Sets the notch width of the notch filter Note Set C5 50 0 Notch Filter Frequency 0 Hz to disable the notch filter 1 0 0 5 5 0 620 C6 Carrier Frequency No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref C6 02 0224 Carrier Frequency Selection Sets the switching frequency carrier frequency for the transistors in the drive 1 2...

Page 479: ...Hz 0 00 590 00 Hz 626 d1 10 028B RUN Reference 10 Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection Note On drives with software versions PRG 01021 and later this function is enabled 0 00 Hz 0 00 590 00 Hz 626 d1 11 028C RUN Reference 11 Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection Note On drives with software versions PR...

Page 480: ...fault Range Ref d3 01 0294 Jump Frequency 1 Sets the median value of the frequency band that the drive will avoid 0 0 Hz Determined by A1 02 629 d3 02 0295 Jump Frequency 2 Sets the median value of the frequency band that the drive will avoid 0 0 Hz Determined by A1 02 629 d3 03 0296 Jump Frequency 3 Sets the median value of the frequency band that the drive will avoid 0 0 Hz Determined by A1 02 6...

Page 481: ...equency 1 Sets the value to add to or subtract from the frequency reference when H1 xx 44 MFDI Function Select Add Offset Frequency 1 d7 01 as a percentage of the maximum output frequency 0 0 100 0 100 0 632 d7 02 02B3 RUN Offset Frequency 2 Sets the value to add to or subtract from the frequency reference when H1 xx 45 MFDI Function Select Add Offset Frequency 2 d7 01 as a percentage of the maxim...

Page 482: ...ned by A1 02 634 E1 04 0303 Maximum Output Frequency Sets the maximum output frequency for the V f pattern Determined by A1 02 Determined by A1 02 639 E1 05 0304 Maximum Output Voltage Sets the maximum output voltage for the V f pattern 200 0 200 V Class 0 0 255 0 V 400 V Class 0 0 510 0 V 639 E1 06 0305 Base Frequency Sets the base frequency for the V f pattern Determined by A1 02 0 0 E1 04 639 E...

Page 483: ...rameters No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref E2 01 030E Motor Rated Current FLA Sets the motor rated current in amps Determined by o2 04 10 to 200 of the drive rated current 641 E2 02 030F Motor Rated Slip Sets motor rated slip Determined by o2 04 0 000 20 000 Hz 642 E2 03 0310 Motor No Load Current Sets the no load current for the motor in amps when operating at the rated frequency and the ...

Page 484: ... f pattern Determined by E3 01 200 V Class 0 0 255 0 V 400 V Class 0 0 510 0 V 645 E3 11 0345 Expert Motor 2 Mid Point B Frequency Sets a middle output frequency for the motor 2 V f pattern Set this parameter to adjust the V f pattern for the constant output range Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter 0 0 Hz 0 0 E3 04 645 E3 12 0346 Expert Motor 2 Mid Point B Voltage Sets a middle o...

Page 485: ...Rated Power Sets the motor rated power in 0 01 kW increments 1 HP 0 746 kW Determined by o2 04 0 00 650 00 kW 648 E7 Motor 3 Parameters No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref E7 04 1B61 Motor 3 Maximum Output Frequency Set the maximum output frequency for the motor 3 Determined by E1 03 40 0 590 0 Hz 649 E7 05 1B62 Motor 3 Maximum Output Voltage Sets the maximum output voltage used for motor 3 ...

Page 486: ...er to adjust the V f pattern for the constant output range 0 0 V 200 V Class 0 0 to 255 0 V 400 V Class 0 0 to 510 0 V 650 E7 21 1B72 Motor 3 Rated Current Sets the motor rated current for motor 3 in amperes Determined by o2 04 10 to 200 of the drive rated current 650 E7 24 1B75 Motor 3 Motor Poles Sets the number of poles for motor 3 4 2 48 650 E7 25 1B76 Motor 3 Line to Line Resistance Sets the ...

Page 487: ...cy is 100 115 0 120 653 F1 09 0388 Overspeed Detection Delay Time Sets the length of time that the speed feedback must be more than the F1 08 level to cause oS Overspeed Note If A1 02 0 Control Method Selection V f you must set H6 01 3 Terminal RP Pulse Train Function Speed Feedback V F Control to enable this parameter Determined by A1 02 0 0 2 0 s 653 F1 10 0389 Speed Deviation Detection Level Se...

Page 488: ... 35 03BE Encoder 2 Pulse Monitor Scaling Sets the dividing ratio for monitor signals output from the encoder option This parameter is for motor 2 001 001 032 102 132 1 1 32 656 F1 36 03B5 Encoder 2 PCB Disconnect Detect Sets the function that enables and disables detection of a disconnected PG X3 encoder connection cable PGoH Encoder PG Hardware Fault is detected when this parameter is enabled Thi...

Page 489: ...s the function for terminal D5 of the DI A3 option when F3 01 8 Digital Input Function Selection Multi Function Digital Input F 0 1FF 661 F3 16 0BE9 Expert Terminal D6 Function Selection Sets the function for terminal D6 of the DI A3 option when F3 01 8 Digital Input Function Selection Multi Function Digital Input F 0 1FF 661 F3 17 0BEA Expert Terminal D7 Function Selection Sets the function for t...

Page 490: ... the analog signal sent from the V2 terminal at 10 Vor 20 mA as 100 when an output for monitoring items is 0 0 0 999 9 999 9 664 F4 07 0397 Terminal V1 Signal Level Sets the output signal level for terminal V1 0 0 to 10 V 1 10 to 10 V 0 0 1 664 F4 08 0398 Terminal V2 Signal Level Sets the output signal level for terminal V2 0 0 to 10 V 1 10 to 10 V 0 0 1 664 F5 Digital Output Option No Hex Name De...

Page 491: ... Stop 2 Fast Stop Use C1 09 3 Alarm Only 1 0 3 669 F6 04 03A5 bUS Error Detection Time Sets the delay time for the drive to detect bUS Option Communication Error Note When you install an option card in the drive the parameter value changes to 0 0 s 2 0 s 0 0 5 0 s 669 F6 06 03A7 Torque Reference Limit by Comm Sets the function that enables and disables the torque limit received from the communicat...

Page 492: ...or MECHATROLINK II Restart the drive after you change the parameter setting Note This parameter is only available with the MECHATROLINK II option 0 10 Mbps 1 4 Mbps 0 0 1 674 F6 23 036E MECHATROLINK Monitor Select E Sets the MEMOBUS register used for the monitor functions of INV_CTL drive operation control command and INV_I O drive I O control command Restart the drive after you change the paramet...

Page 493: ...ion Address Setting Error 0 0 64 676 F6 51 03C2 DeviceNet Baud Rate Sets the DeviceNet communications speed Restart the drive after you change this parameter setting 0 125 kbps 1 250 kbps 2 500 kbps 3 Adjustable from Network 4 Detect Automatically 0 0 4 676 F6 52 03C3 DeviceNet PCA Setting Sets the format of data that the DeviceNet communication master sends to the drive 21 0 255 677 F6 53 03C4 De...

Page 494: ...k Also set parameters F7 05 to F7 12 Subnet Mask 1 to 4 Gateway Address 1 to 4 192 0 255 679 F7 02 03E6 IP Address 2 Sets the second octet of the IP Address for the device that is connecting to the network Restart the drive after you change this parameter Note When F7 13 0 Address Mode at Startup Static Use parameters F7 01 to F7 04 IPAddress 1 to 4 to set the IP Address Be sure to set a different...

Page 495: ...at Startup Static 1 0 255 680 F7 13 03F1 Address Mode at Startup Sets the method to set option card IP addresses 0 Static 1 BOOTP 2 DHCP Note The following setting values are available when using the PROFINET communication option card SI EP3 0 Static 2 DHCP When F7 13 0 set parameters F7 01 to F7 12 IPAddress 1 to Gateway Address 4 to set the IP Address Be sure to set a different IP address for ea...

Page 496: ... Dynamic Out Param 6 for CommCard When you use an Ethernet IP option sets Output Assembly 116 The drive writes the values from Output Assembly 116 to the MEMOBUS Modbus address register that is stored for each parameter The drive will not write the values from Output Assembly 116 to the registers when the MEMOBUS Modbus address is 0 0 682 F7 29 0371 Dynamic Out Param 7 for CommCard When you use an...

Page 497: ...y 166 The drive returns the default register value for the option card when the MEMOBUS Modbus address is 0 and the value sent to Input Assembly 166 is not defined 0 682 F7 41 037D Dynamic In Param 9 for CommCard Sets Input Assembly 166 when you use an Ethernet IP option The drive sends the values from the MEMOBUS Modbus address registers stored for each parameter to Input Assembly 166 The drive r...

Page 498: ... of 0 will disable the PZD4 PPO input load operation from the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 684 F7 74 078E PZD5 Read When you use a Profibus option sets the MEMOBUS Modbus address for PZD5 PPO input A value of 0 will disable the PZD5 PPO input load operation from the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 684 F7 75 078F PZD6 Read When you use a Profibus option sets the MEMOBUS Modbus address for PZD6 PPO input A v...

Page 499: ...1FF 688 H1 24 0B73 Terminal S4 Function Select 2 Sets the second function for MFDI terminal S4 F 0 1FF 688 H1 25 0B74 Terminal S5 Function Select 2 Sets the second function for MFDI terminal S5 F 0 1FF 688 H1 26 0B75 Terminal S6 Function Select 2 Sets the second function for MFDI terminal S6 F 0 1FF 689 H1 27 0B76 Terminal S7 Function Select 2 Sets the second function for MFDI terminal S7 F 0 1FF ...

Page 500: ...rminal is turned ON retains the output frequency that was stored in the drive at the time of the pause and restarts motor operation 692 B Overheat Alarm oH2 Sets the drive to show an oH2 External Overheat H1 XX B alarm when the input terminal is ON The alarm does not have an effect on drive operation 692 C Analog Terminal Enable Selection Sets the command that enables or disables the terminals sel...

Page 501: ... External Fault NC Always Coast 26 External Fault NO Run Coast 27 External Fault NC Run Coast 28 External Fault NO Always FStop 29 External Fault NC Always FStop 2A External Fault NO Run FStop 2B External Fault NC Run FStop 2C External Fault NO Always Alarm 2D External Fault NC Always Alarm 2E External Fault NO Run Alarm 2F External Fault NC Run Alarm 697 30 Light load Accel 1 Enabled Enables or d...

Page 502: ...16 226 3B Micro Speed Gain2 Multiplies the gain set in S2 17 Micro Speed Gain2 by the final step of frequency reference when the terminal is ON 700 216 226 40 Forward RUN 2 Wire Input the Forward Run command for 2 wire sequence 1 Use it paired with the Reverse Run Command 2 Wire Seq H1 xx 41 ON Forward Run OFF Run Stop Note When the both Forward run command and Reverse run command terminals have b...

Page 503: ...nal when H2 01 to H2 05 39 MFDO Function Selection Watt Hour Pulse Output 0 0 1 kWh units 1 1 kWh units 2 10 kWh units 3 100 kWh units 4 1000 kWh units 0 0 4 704 H2 07 0B3A Modbus Register 1 Address Select Sets the address of the MEMOBUS Modbus register output to the MFDO terminal 0001 0001 1FFF 705 H2 08 0B3B Modbus Register 1 Bit Select Sets the bit of the MEMOBUS Modbus register output to the M...

Page 504: ... with H2 26 Comparator 2 Monitor Selection 0 0s 0 0 10 0 s 708 H2 35 159D Comparator2 Protection Selection Selects the operation of the drive when CP2 Comparator2 Limit Fault is detected 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop Use C1 09 3 Alarm Only 4 Digital Output Only 4 0 4 708 H2 36 159E Comparator 1 Ineffective Time Sets the length of time that CP1 Comparator1 Limit Fault is disabled 0 0 s...

Page 505: ...d to output the logical calculation results from terminal P1 C1 0 1 s 0 0 25 0 s 711 H2 72 11FB Expert Digital Output 5 Secondary Func Sets the second function for terminal P2 C2 The logical calculation results of the terminals assigned to functions by H2 05 Term P2 C2 Function Selection is output F 0 FF 711 H2 73 11FC Expert DigitalOutput5 Logical Operation Sets the logical operation for the func...

Page 506: ...uency Detection 2 The terminal activates when the output frequency L4 01 Speed Agree Detection Level After the terminal activates the terminal stays activated until the output frequency is at the value of L4 01 L4 02 Note The detection function operates in the two motor rotation directions The drive uses the L4 01 value as the forward reverse detection level The drive outputs the motor speed statu...

Page 507: ...nce ON The output frequency L4 03 or the output frequency L4 03 L4 04 OFF The output frequency is higher than L4 03 L4 04 717 16 Frequency Detection 4 The terminal activates when the output frequency L4 03 Speed Agree Detection Level After the terminal activates the terminal stays activated until the output frequency L4 03 L4 04 Note The detection level set in L4 03 is a signed value The drive wil...

Page 508: ...ncy ON The drive outputs frequency OFF The drive does not output frequency 720 39 Watt Hour Pulse Output Outputs the pulse that shows the watt hours 720 3C LOCAL Control Selected The terminal activates when the Run command source or frequency reference source is LOCAL ON LOCAL OFF REMOTE 721 4C During Fast Stop The terminal activates when the fast stop is in operation 721 4D oH Pre Alarm Time Limi...

Page 509: ...topped and during DC Injection Braking 723 B3 Motor 3 Selection The terminal activates when you select motor 3 ON Motor 3 Selected OFF Motor 1 or Motor 2 Selected 723 216 226 100 1FF Inverse Output of 0 to FF Causes inverse output of the function for the selected MFDO Uses the last two digits of 1xx to select which function to inversely output 723 H3 Analog Inputs No Hex Name Description Default R...

Page 510: ...ts the MEMOBUS AI2 function F 4 2F 729 H3 42 0B62 Mbus Reg 15C3h Input Function Sets the MEMOBUS AI3 function F 4 2F 729 H3 43 117F Mbus Reg Inputs FilterTime Const Sets the time constant to apply a primary delay filter to the MEMOBUS analog input register values 0 00 s 0 00 2 00 s 730 H3 xx Multi Function Analog Input Terminal Settings Setting Value Function Description Ref 0 Frequency Reference ...

Page 511: ...ets the monitor number to send from MFAO terminal FM Set the x xx part of the Ux xx Monitor For example set H4 01 102 to monitor U1 02 Output Frequency 102 000 999 736 H4 02 041E RUN Terminal FM Analog Output Gain Sets the gain of the Ux xx monitor signal set in H4 01 terminals FM Monitor Selection When an output for monitoring items is 100 this parameter sets the analog signal output level from t...

Page 512: ... 0427 Communication Parity Selection Sets the communications parity used for MEMOBUS Modbus communications Note Re energize the drive or set H5 20 1 Communication Parameters Reload Reload Now after you change the parameter setting 0 No parity 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity 0 0 2 738 H5 04 0428 Communication Error Stop Method Sets the motor Stopping Method when the drive detects CE MEMOBUS Modbus Commu...

Page 513: ...OBUS Modbus communications register when responding to the master device 0049H U1 10 0000H FFFFH 741 H7 Virtual Inputs Outputs No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref H7 00 116F Expert Virtual MFIO selection Sets the function to enable and disable the virtual I O function Set this parameter to 1 to operate the virtual I O function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 0 1 741 H7 01 1185 Expert Virtual Multi Fu...

Page 514: ...put Gain Sets the virtual analog input gain 100 0 999 9 999 9 743 H7 32 1179 RUN Expert Virtual Analog Input Bias Sets the virtual analog input bias 0 0 999 9 999 9 743 H7 40 1163 Virtual Analog Out Signal Select Sets the signal level of the virtual analog output 0 0 to 100 Absolute Value 1 100 to 100 2 0 to 100 Lower Limit at 0 0 0 2 743 H7 41 1164 Virtual Analog Output Function Sets the monitor ...

Page 515: ...ts accidental motor overheat faults 0 20 s 0 00 10 00 s 749 L1 08 1103 oL1 Current Level Sets the reference current for the motor 1 thermal overload detection Note When the current level 0 0 A you cannot set this value 10 of drive rated current 0 0A 0 0 A or 10 to 150 of the drive rated current 749 L1 09 1104 oL1 Current Level for Motor 2 Sets the reference current for the motor 2 thermal overload...

Page 516: ...Disable 1 Deceleration Time 1 C1 02 2 Deceleration Time 2 C1 04 1 0 2 754 L3 06 0494 Stall Prevent Level during Run Sets the output current level at which the Stall Prevention function is enabled during run when the drive rated output current is 100 Note This parameter is valid if L3 05 1 2 Stall Prevent Select during Run Decel time 1 Decel time 2 The upper limit of this setting is determined by L...

Page 517: ...d Sets the level to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2 01 to H2 05 2 3 4 5 MFDO Function Selection Speed Agree 1 User set Speed Agree 1 Frequency Detection 1 Frequency Detection 2 Determined by A1 02 Determined by A1 02 758 L4 02 049A Speed Agree Detection Width Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed when H2 01 to H2 05 2 3 4 ...

Page 518: ... Sets the frequency width at which L7 35 Low Freq Regen Torque Limit Lvl operates 6 0 Hz 0 0 30 0 Hz 762 L8 Hardware Protection No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref L8 01 04AD 3 ERF DB Resistor Protection Sets the function to enable braking resistor protection with a Yaskawa ERF series braking resistor 3 ED 0 Disable 1 Enabled 0 0 1 762 L8 02 04AE Overheat Alarm Level Sets the oH detection le...

Page 519: ...0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 0 1 765 L8 19 04BF Freq Reduction oH Pre Alarm Sets the ratio at which the drive derates the frequency reference during an oH alarm 0 8 0 1 0 9 765 L8 32 04E2 Cooling Fan Failure Selection Sets operation when the drive detects FAn Internal Fan Fault 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop Use C1 09 3 Alarm Only 4 Operate at Reduced Speed L8 19 1 0 4 766 L8 35 04EC Install...

Page 520: ...Technical Manual L9 Drive Protection 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref L9 16 11DC Expert FAn1 Detect Time Sets the detection time for FAn1 Drive Cooling Fan Fault Yaskawa recommends that you do not change this parameter value 4 0 s 0 0 30 0 s 768 V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV ...

Page 521: ... 1 One Time Calibrate at Next Start 2 Calibrate Every Time at Start Determined by A1 02 0 2 770 n1 16 0BFB Hunting Prevention High Fc Gain Sets the gain for the hunting prevention function This parameter functions best with a high carrier frequency Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter Determined by o2 04 0 00 2 50 770 n1 17 0BFC Expert Hunting Prevent High Fc Filter Sets the respon...

Page 522: ...timate Response Low Freq In low speed ranges where 0 the output frequency which is n4 67 SwitchingFreq forEstimation gain this adjusts the responsiveness of the speed estimation 60 0 0 1 300 0 775 n4 65 1B85 Flux Estimate Response High Freq In high speed ranges where the output frequency is n4 67 SwitchingFreq forEstimation gain this adjusts the responsiveness of the magnetic flux estimation Usual...

Page 523: ... Forward Control Gain Sets the ratio between load inertia and motor inertia Inertia Tuning automatically sets the Feedforward Control Gain value 1 00 0 00 100 00 779 n5 04 05B3 RUN Expert Speed Response Frequency Sets the response frequency for the speed reference Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter Determined by A1 02 0 00 500 00 Hz 779 n6 Online Resistance Tuning No Hex Name Des...

Page 524: ...t Sets the contrast of the LCD display on the keypad 5 0 10 783 o1 10 0520 User Units Maximum Value Sets the value that the drive shows as the maximum output frequency Determined by o1 03 1 60000 784 o1 11 0521 User Units Decimal Position Sets the number of decimal places for frequency reference and monitor values 0 No Decimal Places XXXXX 1 One Decimal Places XXXX X 2 Two Decimal Places XXX XX 3 ...

Page 525: ...tor set in o1 26 Custom Monitor 3 as a bar graph This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad 100 0 0 0 100 0 787 o1 47 11C7 RUN Trend Plot 1 Scale Minimum Value Sets the minimum value for the vertical axis used to display a trend plot from the monitor selected with o1 24 This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad 100 0 300 0 99 9 787 o1 48 11C8 RUN Trend Plot 1 Scale Maximum Value...

Page 526: ...1 789 o2 07 0527 Keypad RUN Direction Power up Sets the direction of motor rotation when the drive is energized and the keypad is the Run command source 0 Forward 1 Reverse 0 0 1 789 o2 23 11F8 RUN External 24V Powerloss Detection Sets the function to give a warning if the backup external 24 V power supply turns off when the main circuit power supply is in operation 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 0 1 790 ...

Page 527: ...atic parameter backup function saves parameters from the drive to the keypad Note This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad 0 Every 10 minutes 1 Every 30 minutes 2 Every 60 minutes 3 Every 12 hours 1 0 3 792 o4 Maintenance Monitors No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref o4 01 050B Elapsed Operating Time Setting Sets the initial value of the cumulative drive operation time in 10 ...

Page 528: ...ly available on an LCD keypad 1000 ms 100 60000 ms 797 o5 03 1553 RUN Log Monitor Data 1 Sets the data log monitor This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad 101 000 101 999 798 o5 04 1554 RUN Log Monitor Data 2 Sets the data log monitor This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad 102 000 101 999 798 o5 05 1555 RUN Log Monitor Data 3 Sets the data log monitor This para...

Page 529: ...Default Range Ref o5 11 155B RUN Log Monitor Data 9 Sets the data log monitor This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad 000 000 101 999 799 o5 12 155C RUN Log Monitor Data 10 Sets the data log monitor This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad 000 000 101 999 799 V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV ...

Page 530: ...0 195 226 S1 06 0685 Brake Release Current REV Set the output current level at which to activate the brake release command during reverse run Note You must satisfy these three conditions to output the brake release command Output frequency after a soft start Brake release frequency Output current Brake release current Torque reference Brake release torque A1 02 2 3 or 4 Control Method Selection OL...

Page 531: ... 216 226 S1 26 06C7 Motor2 Brake Delay Time Sets the motor 2 brake delay time Determined by E3 01 0 00 10 00 s 216 226 S1 27 06C8 M2 Brake Release Current FWD Sets the motor 2 forward operation brake release current 50 0 200 216 226 S1 28 06C9 M2 Brake Release Current REV Sets the motor 2 reverse operation brake release current 30 0 200 216 226 S1 29 06CA M2 Brake Release Torque FWD Sets the motor...

Page 532: ...V Sets the time that the Reverse run command is held internally 0 00 s 0 00 10 00 s 204 226 S2 03 0696 Run Cmd Delay Timer REV FWD Sets the time before the Forward run command is accepted after the reverse run stops 0 00 s 0 00 10 00 s 204 226 S2 08 1A82 Number of Driving count selec Sets the type of startup count for motors 1 to 3 0 Run Command count 1 Brake Release Command count 0 0 1 221 226 S2...

Page 533: ... drive will operate at the frequency set with S3 01 Impact Stop Creep Frequency If the torque does not reach the value set in S3 03 Impact Stop Detect Torque FWD or S3 04 Impact Stop Detect Torque REV for longer than S3 02 the motor will stop 10 0 s 0 0 20 0 s 206 226 S3 03 0699 Impact Stop Detect Torque FWD Sets the impact stop torque for forward run 100 0 200 206 226 S3 04 069A Impact Stop Detec...

Page 534: ... stop 2 Emergency stop 3 Acceleration prohibited 4 Frequency deceleration 2 0 4 210 226 S4 15 06AA L L 2 Fault Detection Level Sets the level to trigger Light load Accel 2 Fault oL6 100 is the motor rated power 150 0 200 210 226 S4 16 06AB L L 2 Fault Detection Time Sets the time to trigger Light load Accel 2 Fault oL6 0 1 s 0 0 10 0 s 210 226 S4 17 06AC L L 2 Accel Time Gain Sets the acceleration...

Page 535: ...Time 2 Sets the overload detection time 2 0 1 s 0 0 10 0 s 213 226 S6 Overtorque Detection No Hex Name Description Default Range Ref S6 01 06B6 OverT Detect Operation Select 1 Sets whether to enable or disable overtorque detection the detection conditions and the drive operation after detection of faults 0 Disabled 1 oL3 Speed Agree Alarm only 2 oL3 RUN Alarm only 3 oL3 Speed Agree Fault 4 oL3 RUN...

Page 536: ...ef S6 06 06BB Overtorque Detection Time 2 Sets the overtorque detection time 2 0 1 s 0 0 10 0 s 214 226 S6 09 1A93 Torque Detection Filter Time Sets the time constant for a primary filter to the torque reference or to the output current used to detect overtorque 0 ms 0 1000 ms 214 226 V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV ...

Page 537: ...base frequency Hz of the motor 50 0 Hz 0 0 590 0 Hz 801 T1 06 0706 Number of Motor Poles Sets the number of motor poles 4 2 120 802 T1 07 0707 Motor Base Speed Sets the motor base speed for Auto Tuning min 1 r min 1750 min 1 r min 0 35400 min 1 r min 802 T1 08 0708 Encoder Pulse Count PPR Sets the number of PG pulse generator encoder pulses 600 ppr 0 60 000 ppr 802 T1 09 0709 Motor No Load Current...

Page 538: ...3 02 0761 Test Signal Amplitude Sets the amplitude of the test signal applied to the motor during Inertia Tuning Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 0 5 rad 0 1 10 0 rad 803 T3 03 0762 Motor Inertia Sets the inertia of the motor This value uses the test signal response to calculate the load inertia Determined by o2 04 0 0001 6 0000 kgm2 803 T3 04 0763 System Response Frequency This ...

Page 539: ...nits Unit 0 01 Hz 10 V Maximum frequency 0 V to 10 V U1 06 0045 Output Voltage Ref Shows the output voltage reference Unit 0 1 V 200 V Class 10 V 200 Vrms 400 V Class 10 V 400 Vrms U1 07 0046 DC Bus Voltage Shows the DC bus voltage Unit 1 V 200 V Class 10 V 400 V 400 V Class 10 V 800 V U1 08 0047 Output Power Shows the internally calculated output power Changing the setting of A1 02 Control Method...

Page 540: ... Maximum frequency 0 V to 10 V U1 17 0058 DI A3 Input Status Shows the reference value input from DI A3 option Shows the input signal for DI A3 in hexadecimal as set in F3 01 Digital Input Function Selection 3FFFF Set 1 bit Sign 1 bit 16 bit No signal output available U1 18 0061 oPE Fault Parameter Shows the parameter number that caused the oPE02 Parameter Range Setting Error or oPE08 Parameter Se...

Page 541: ...ccurred most recently No signal output available U2 03 0082 Freq Reference Fault Shows the frequency reference at the fault that occurred most recently Use U1 01 Frequency Reference to monitor the frequency reference value Unit 0 01 Hz No signal output available U2 04 0083 Output Freq Fault Shows the output frequency at the fault that occurred most recently Use U1 02 Output Frequency to monitor th...

Page 542: ...s P1 C1 bit 4 Terminals P2 C2 bit 5 Not used normal value of 0 bit 6 Not used normal value of 0 bit 7 Fault relay MA MB MC No signal output available U2 13 008C Operation Status Fault Shows the status of the MFDO terminals at the most recent fault where 1 ON and 0 OFF For example U2 13 shows 00000001 during run Use U1 12 Drive Status to monitor the MFDO terminal status bit0 During Run bit1 During ...

Page 543: ... Modbus communications No signal output available U3 02 0091 2nd MostRecent Fault Shows the fault history of the second most recent fault Note The drive saves this fault history to two types of registers at the same time for the MEMOBUS Modbus communications No signal output available U3 03 0092 3rd MostRecent Fault Shows the fault history of the third most recent fault Note The drive saves this f...

Page 544: ...ccurred Unit 1 h No signal output available U3 18 0811 ElapsedTime 8thFault Shows the cumulative operation time when the eighth most recent fault occurred Unit 1 h No signal output available U3 19 0812 ElapsedTime 9thFault Shows the cumulative operation time when the ninth most recent fault occurred Unit 1 h No signal output available U3 20 0813 ElapsedTime 10 Fault Shows the cumulative operation ...

Page 545: ...T Maintenance Shows the operation time of the IGBTs as a percentage of the replacement life of the IGBTs Set parameter o4 09 IGBT Maintenance Setting to reset this monitor Unit 1 Note Replace the drive when this monitor is 90 10 V 100 U4 08 0068 Heatsink Temperature Shows the heatsink temperature of the drive Unit 1 C 10 V 100 C U4 09 005E LED Check Turns on the LED Status Ring and all of the keyp...

Page 546: ...ermined by o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection No signal output available U4 15 007F Torque Ref UL1 Check this when adjusting light load accel 1 torque reference monitor S4 04 Light load 1 Detect Torque FWD Unit 0 1 0 1 U4 16 07D8 Motor oL1 Level Shows the integrated value of oL1 Motor Overload as a percentage of oL1 detection level Unit 0 1 10 V 100 U4 18 07DA Reference Source Displays the fre...

Page 547: ... Frequency during baseblock 09 Waiting for the Enter command from PLC No signal output available U4 22 07DE Modbus CmdData hex Displays the operation signal register No 0001H from MEMOBUS Modbus communications to the drive as a four digit hexadecimal number zero suppress The operation signal is displayed in the following way bit 0 Forward run Stop bit 1 Reverse run Stop bit 2 External Fault bit 3 ...

Page 548: ...n 8 digit number The upper 4 digits of U4 56 and the lower 4 digits of U4 55 Num of Driv 2 Low appear The maximum count value is 10 000 000 No signal output available U4 57 1597 Num of Driv 3 Low Displays the lower 4 digits of the cumulative motor 3 startup count Note The startup count 3 appears as an 8 digit number The upper 4 digits of U4 58 Num of Driv 3 High and the lower 4 digits of U4 57 app...

Page 549: ...p Unit 0 01 10 V Motor secondary rated current 10 V to 10 V U6 26 006C Expert Feed Fwd Cont Output Displays the Feed Forward control output Unit 0 01 10 V Motor secondary rated current 10 V to 10 V U6 27 006D Expert FeedFwd Estimate Spd Shows the feed forward estimated speed Unit 0 01 10 V Maximum frequency 10 V to 10 V U6 31 007B TorqueDetect Monitor Monitors the torque reference or the output cu...

Page 550: ...cations speed 10 10 Mbps 100 100 Mbps No signal output available U6 93 07F3 Online Duplex Shows the currently available Duplex setting No signal output available U6 98 07F8 First Fault Shows the contents of the most recent communication options fault DeviceNet Modbus TCP IP EtherNet IP No signal output available U6 99 07F9 Current Fault Shows the contents of current fault from communication option...

Page 551: ...0 2 5 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 C3 02 Slip Compensation Delay Time 0 10000 1 ms 2000 200 C4 01 Torque Compensation Gain 0 00 2 50 0 01 1 00 1 00 1 00 C4 02 Torque Compensation Delay Time 0 10000 1 ms 200 200 20 C4 13 Torque Comp Delay Time Select 1 0 60000 1 ms 200 200 20 20 C4 15 Torque Comp Delay Time Select 2 0 60000 1 ms 200 200 20 20 C4 16 Torque Comp Delay Time Select 3 0 60000 1 ms 200 200 20 20 ...

Page 552: ...Freq Volt Select 3 0 0 255 0 0 1 V 15 0 1 15 0 1 14 4 0 0 E1 19 Minimum Out Freq Volt Select 3 0 0 255 0 0 1 V 9 0 1 9 0 1 3 0 0 0 F1 01 Encoder 1 Pulse Count PPR 0 60000 1 ppr 600 600 600 600 600 F1 05 Encoder 1 Rotation Selection 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 F1 09 Overspeed Detection Delay Time 0 0 2 0 0 1 s 1 0 0 0 0 1 H4 20 Analog Power Monitor 100 Level 0 00 650 00 0 01 Default value of E2 11 Default valu...

Page 553: ...n Display Unit 0 1 1 0 0 S1 03 Brake Delay Frequency 0 0 400 0 0 1 Hz 3 0 3 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 S1 04 Brake Delay Time 0 00 10 00 0 01 s 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 00 0 30 S1 09 Torque Compensation FWD 200 200 1 50 0 50 S1 14 Slip Prevention Frequency 0 0 20 0 0 1 Hz 3 0 3 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 S1 15 Slip Prevention Time 0 00 10 00 0 01 s 0 30 0 30 0 30 0 00 0 30 S3 01 Impact Stop Creep Frequency 0 0 20 0 0 1 Hz 6 0 6 0 ...

Page 554: ...004 E3 04 Motor 2 Maximum Output Frequency 40 0 590 0 0 1 Hz 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 E3 05 Motor 2 Maximum Output Voltage 0 0 255 0 1 0 1 V 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 E3 06 Motor 2 Base Frequency 0 0 590 0 0 1 Hz 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 E3 07 Motor 2 Mid Point A Frequency 0 0 590 0 0 1 Hz 2 5 2 5 3 0 E3 08 Motor 2 Mid Point A Voltage 0 0 255 0 1 0 1 V 15 0 15 0 14 4 E3 09 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency 0 0...

Page 555: ...E1 15 2 V 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 8 0 9 0 8 0 9 0 11 0 13 0 11 0 15 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 1 3 0 E1 16 2 V 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 35 0 50 0 35 0 50 0 19 0 24 0 19 0 24 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 1 14 4 E1 17 2 V 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 8 0 9 0 8 0 9 0 11 0 13 0 11 0 15 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 1 3 0 E1 18 2 V 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 35 0 50 0 35 0 50 0 19 0 24 0 19 0 24 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 15 0 1 14 4 E1 19 2 V 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 8 0 9 0 8 0 ...

Page 556: ... 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 1 200 0 200 0 E1 06 Hz 50 0 60 0 50 0 60 0 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 50 0 1 50 0 50 0 E1 07 Hz 2 5 3 0 3 0 3 0 25 0 25 0 30 0 30 0 2 5 2 5 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 2 5 1 3 0 E1 08 2 V 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 35 0 50 0 35 0 50 0 15 0 20 0 15 0 20 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 1 13 2 E1 09 Hz 1 3 1...

Page 557: ...otor Rated Current FLA A 1 9 3 3 6 2 Motor 1 E2 02 Motor 2 E4 02 Motor Rated Slip Hz 2 9 2 5 2 6 Motor 1 E2 03 Motor 2 E4 03 Motor No Load Current A 1 2 1 8 2 8 Motor 1 E2 05 Motor 2 E4 05 Motor 3 E7 25 Motor Line to Line Resistance Ω 9 842 5 156 1 997 Motor 1 E2 06 Motor 2 E4 06 Motor Leakage Inductance 18 2 13 8 18 5 Motor 1 E2 10 Motor 2 E4 10 Motor Iron Loss W 14 26 53 L2 03 Minimum Baseblock ...

Page 558: ...ce 18 4 19 19 6 18 2 Motor 1 E2 10 Motor 2 E4 10 Motor Iron Loss W 77 91 112 172 L2 03 Minimum Baseblock Time s 0 5 0 5 0 6 0 7 L2 05 Undervoltage Detection Lvl Uv1 190 190 190 190 L3 24 Motor Accel Time Rated Torque s 0 145 0 145 0 154 0 168 L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level C 124 110 110 110 L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection 1 1 1 1 L8 38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2 2 2 2 L8 39 Carrier Freq Reducti...

Page 559: ... Detection Lvl Uv1 190 190 190 190 L3 24 Motor Accel Time Rated Torque s 0 175 0 265 0 244 0 317 L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level C 110 115 120 133 L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection 1 1 1 1 L8 38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2 2 2 2 L8 39 Carrier Freq Reduction during oL 2 2 2 2 n1 01 Hunting Prevention Selection 1 2 2 2 n1 03 Hunting Prevention Time Constant ms 10 10 10 10 n1 16 Hunting Prevention Hig...

Page 560: ...t Detection 1 1 1 1 L8 38 Carrier Frequency Reduction 2 2 2 2 L8 39 Carrier Freq Reduction during oL 2 2 2 2 n1 01 Hunting Prevention Selection 2 2 2 2 n1 03 Hunting Prevention Time Constant ms 10 10 10 10 n1 16 Hunting Prevention High Fc Gain 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 n2 01 Automatic Freq Regulator Gain F 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 n5 02 Motor Inertia Acceleration Time s 0 355 0 323 0 32 0 387 No Name Unit De...

Page 561: ...g Prevention Selection 2 2 2 2 n1 03 Hunting Prevention Time Constant ms 10 10 100 100 n1 16 Hunting Prevention High Fc Gain 0 50 0 50 1 00 1 00 n2 01 Automatic Freq Regulator Gain F 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 n5 02 Motor Inertia Acceleration Time s 0 317 0 533 0 592 0 646 400 V Class No Name Unit Default Drive Model 4002 4003 4005 4006 o2 04 Drive Model KVA Selection Hex 92 93 94 95 Motor 1 E2 11 Motor ...

Page 562: ...c Gain 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 n2 01 Automatic Freq Regulator Gain F 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 n5 02 Motor Inertia Acceleration Time s 0 178 0 142 0 166 0 145 No Name Unit Default Drive Model 4007 4009 4015 4018 o2 04 Drive Model KVA Selection Hex 96 97 99 9A Motor 1 E2 11 Motor 2 E4 11 Motor 3 E7 31 Motor Rated Power kW 3 0 4 0 5 5 7 5 Motor 1 C5 17 Motor 2 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 0158 0 0158 0 026 0 03...

Page 563: ...175 No Name Unit Default Drive Model 4024 4031 4039 4045 o2 04 Drive Model KVA Selection Hex 9C 9D 9E 9F Motor 1 E2 11 Motor 2 E4 11 Motor 3 E7 31 Motor Rated Power kW 11 15 18 5 22 Motor 1 C5 17 Motor 2 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 053 0 076 0 138 0 165 C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 1 1 1 E1 01 Input AC Supply Voltage V 400 400 400 400 Motor 1 E2 01 Motor 2 E4 01 Motor 3 E7 21 Motor Rated Cur...

Page 564: ...Rated Power kW 30 37 45 55 Motor 1 C5 17 Motor 2 C5 37 Motor Inertia kgm2 0 220 0 273 0 333 0 49 C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 1 1 1 E1 01 Input AC Supply Voltage V 400 400 400 400 Motor 1 E2 01 Motor 2 E4 01 Motor 3 E7 21 Motor Rated Current FLA A 52 3 65 6 79 7 95 Motor 1 E2 02 Motor 2 E4 02 Motor Rated Slip Hz 1 8 1 33 1 6 1 46 Motor 1 E2 03 Motor 2 E4 03 Motor No Load Current A 10 9 19 1...

Page 565: ... Frequency Selection 1 1 1 1 E1 01 Input AC Supply Voltage V 400 400 400 400 Motor 1 E2 01 Motor 2 E4 01 Motor 3 E7 21 Motor Rated Current FLA A 130 156 190 223 Motor 1 E2 02 Motor 2 E4 02 Motor Rated Slip Hz 1 39 1 4 1 4 1 38 Motor 1 E2 03 Motor 2 E4 03 Motor No Load Current A 36 40 49 58 Motor 1 E2 05 Motor 2 E4 05 Motor 3 E7 25 Motor Line to Line Resistance Ω 0 092 0 056 0 046 0 035 Motor 1 E2 ...

Page 566: ...r Rated Current FLA A 270 310 370 500 Motor 1 E2 02 Motor 2 E4 02 Motor Rated Slip Hz 1 35 1 3 1 3 1 25 Motor 1 E2 03 Motor 2 E4 03 Motor No Load Current A 70 81 96 130 Motor 1 E2 05 Motor 2 E4 05 Motor 3 E7 25 Motor Line to Line Resistance Ω 0 029 0 025 0 02 0 014 Motor 1 E2 06 Motor 2 E4 06 Motor Leakage Inductance 20 20 20 20 Motor 1 E2 10 Motor 2 E4 10 Motor Iron Loss W 2850 3200 3700 4700 L2 ...

Page 567: ...ety 568 11 2 A Initialization Parameters 569 11 3 b Application 584 11 4 C Tuning 600 11 5 d References 622 11 6 E Motor Parameters 633 11 7 F Options 651 11 8 H Terminal Functions 686 11 9 L Protection Function 745 11 10 n Special Adjustment 769 11 11 o Keypad Related Settings 781 11 12 T Auto Tuning 800 ...

Page 568: ...ive CR700 Technical Manual 11 1 Section Safety DANGER Do not ignore the safety messages in this manual If you ignore the safety messages in this manual it will cause serious injury or death The manufacturer is not responsible for injuries or damage to equipment ...

Page 569: ...ters you can set 2 0 3 0 Operation Only Access to A1 00 A1 01 A1 04 Password and the U Monitors 1 User Parameters Access to A1 00 A1 01 A1 04 and A2 01 to A2 32 User Parameters 1 to 32 only 2 Advanced Level Access to all parameters but not Expert Mode parameters 3 Expert Level Access to all parameters including Expert Mode parameters This table lists the access permissions to keypad screen in acco...

Page 570: ...edback signal from the motor The speed control range is 1 120 3 Closed Loop Vector Use this control method for general variable speed control applications that require high torque response high precision speed control up to zero speed and high precision torque control This method requires a speed feedback signal from the motor The speed control range is 1 1500 4 Advanced Open Loop Vector This is a...

Page 571: ...does not initialize A1 02 when the user sets A1 03 2220 Setting A1 03 2220 initializes A1 05 Password Setting to 0000 Be sure to set the password again for applications that require a password A1 04 Password No Hex Name Description Default Range A1 04 0104 Password Enter the correct password set in A1 05 Password Setting to unlock parameters You can view parameter settings Monitors are locked Ente...

Page 572: ...han the password such as 0000 in A1 04 If A1 04 A1 05 MEMOBUS Communication cannot read or write A1 05 A1 06 Application Preset WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard Check the I O signals and the external sequences for the drive before you set the Application Preset function When you set the Application Preset function A1 06 0 it changes the I O terminal functions for the drive and it can cause equipment...

Page 573: ...rrent FLA A2 21 E2 04 Motor Pole Count A2 22 E2 11 Motor Rated Power A2 23 H4 02 Terminal FM Analog Output Gain A2 24 L1 01 Motor Overload oL1 Protection A2 25 L3 04 Stall Prevention during Decel 1 Crane Hoist The drive automatically sets these parameters for a hoist application Note Make sure that you do Auto Tuning after you set A1 06 for a hoist application Refer to Notes when Opening and Closi...

Page 574: ...SE2 Detect Time 1 00 s S1 18 Sequence Fault SE3 Detect Time 0 50 s S1 19 Sequence Fault SE4 Detect Time 0 50 s S1 54 Brake Sequence Selection 1 Enabled The drive saves these parameters as user parameters Table 11 3 Parameters Saved as User Parameters with the Hoist Preset User Parameter No Parameter No Saved Name A2 01 A1 02 Control Method Selection A2 02 b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 A2 0...

Page 575: ... Frequency REV 0 0 Hz S1 14 Slip Prevention Frequency 0 0 Hz S1 15 Slip Prevention Time 0 00 s S1 16 Sequence Fault SE1 Detect Time 0 00 s S1 17 Sequence Fault SE2 Detect Time 0 00 s S1 18 Sequence Fault SE3 Detect Time 0 00 s S1 19 Sequence Fault SE4 Detect Time 0 00 s S1 54 Brake Sequence Selection 0 Disabled The drive saves these parameters as user parameters Table 11 5 Parameters Saved as User...

Page 576: ...ent Alarm Selection 1 Enabled S1 01 Brake Release Frequency FWD 0 0 Hz S1 02 Brake Release Frequency REV 2 0 Hz S1 03 Brake Delay Frequency 0 0 Hz S1 04 Brake Delay Time 0 00 s S1 09 Torque Compensation FWD 0 S1 12 Brake Hold Frequency FWD 3 0 Hz S1 13 Brake Hold Frequency REV 3 0 Hz S1 14 Slip Prevention Frequency 0 0 Hz S1 15 Slip Prevention Time 0 00 s S1 16 Sequence Fault SE1 Detect Time 0 30 ...

Page 577: ...tection Width L4 02 0 0 Hz to 0 5 Hz 2 During Frequency Output H2 01 37 DC Injection Zero SpeedThreshold b2 01 0 1 Hz to 0 5 Hz x 1 When A1 02 2 Open Loop Vector it is the usual setting range When A1 02 0 V f Control set L4 01 to the rated slip frequency of the motor approximately 0 5 Hz If you set the value too low motor torque will not be sufficient and it will cause motor rollback Be sure to se...

Page 578: ... do Rotational Auto Tuning Auto Tuning runs automatically for approximately 1 minute Do not do Auto Tuning with the motor engaged in the elevator system Note If you cannot disconnect the motor from the machine do Stationary Auto Tuning When you do Stationary Auto Tuning the drive energizes the motor and the motor stays stopped During this time the drive automatically measures the necessary motor d...

Page 579: ...ow these precautions Load a sequence that opens and closes the electromagnetic contactor when both of the following conditions are satisfied at once Unless there is an emergency The holding brake is fully closed The drive terminals for H2 xx 8 or 1B MFDO Function Selection During Baseblock are ON If the electromagnetic contactor is opened and closed during motor control or during DC Injection Brak...

Page 580: ...or during DC Injection Braking Zero speed level a voltage surge can trigger a fault When you use an electromagnetic contactor between the drive and motor set L8 07 1 or 2 Output Phase Loss Protection Sel Fault when one phase is lost Fault when two phases are lost Adjustment Parameter Name b2 01 DC Injection Zero SpeedThreshold b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current b2 04 DC Inject Braking Time at Stop...

Page 581: ...ior to running the drive up till drive operation completes The default setting is 10 V 100 torque Enter a positive polarity during a motoring load and enter a negative polarity during a regenerative load Time chart Decrease In the same manner as an increase enter the analog signal as the torque compensation torque bias signal in accordance with load amount before running the drive up to when it fi...

Page 582: ...ult Range A1 11 111D Expert Firmware Update Lock Protects the drive firmware When you enable the protection you cannot update the drive firmware 0 0 1 0 Disabled Lock is disabled 1 Enabled Lock is enabled A1 12 Bluetooth ID No Hex Name Description Default Range A1 12 1564 Bluetooth ID Sets the password necessary to use Bluetooth to control the drive with a smartphone or tablet 1915 0000 9999 A1 13...

Page 583: ...on Sets the automatic save feature for changes to parameters A2 17 to A2 32 User Parameters 17 to 32 1 0 1 0 Disabled Manual Entry Required Set User Parameters manually 1 Enabled Auto Save Recent Parms The drive automatically registers any parameters that are changed to A2 17 to A2 32 The drive automatically saves the most recently changed parameter to A2 17 and saves a maximum of 16 parameters On...

Page 584: ...e more than or equal to the E1 09 value 0 Keypad Use the keypad to enter the frequency reference The frequency reference can be changed by using and on the keypad 1 Digital Input Use the MFAI terminals A1 A2 and A3 to input an analog frequency reference with a voltage or current input signal Voltage Input Refer to this table to use a voltage signal input to one of the MFAI terminals Table 11 9 Fre...

Page 585: ...d connected to the drive to enter the frequency reference Refer to the instruction manual included with the option card for installing and setting the option card Note If b1 01 3 but no connected option card then oPE05 Run Cmd Freq Ref Source Sel Err will flash on the keypad b1 02 Run Command Selection 1 No Hex Name Description Default Range b1 02 0181 Run Command Selection 1 Sets the input method...

Page 586: ... Deceleration Time 1 The actual deceleration time will vary depending on load conditions such as mechanical loss and inertia If the output frequency falls below or is equal to the value set in b2 01 DC Injection Zero SpeedThreshold during deceleration then the drive will perform DC Injection Braking or Zero Speed Control depending on the control mode Ramp to stop with V f control Advanced Open Loo...

Page 587: ...command is switched OFF Do not enter the Run command until the motor comes to a complete stop Use DC Injection to restart the motor before it stops 2 DC Injection Braking to Stop The drive shuts off its output for the time set in L2 03 when the Stop command is entered or when the Run command is switched OFF Once the minimum baseblock time has passed the drive then injects the amount of DC current ...

Page 588: ...o start the drive again re enter the Run command once the Run wait time t has passed Figure 11 14 Coast to Stop with Timer The active deceleration time and the output frequency when the Stop command is entered determine the length of Run wait time t Figure 11 15 Run Wait Time and Output Frequency b1 04 Reverse Operation Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range b1 04 0183 Reverse Operation S...

Page 589: ...nce 1 Coast to Stop If the frequency reference is less than the value set in E1 09 the drive stops motor voltage output and the motor coasts to stop If the motor speed is less than or equal to the value set in b2 01 the drive will do Zero Speed Control for the time set in b2 04 Figure 11 17 Coast to Stop 2 Operate at Minimum Frequency If the frequency reference is less than the value set in E1 09 ...

Page 590: ...inals U T1 V T2 and W T3 This parameter can align the Forward Run command from the drive and the forward direction of the motor without changing wiring 0 0 1 0 Standard 1 Switch Phase Order b1 15 Frequency Reference Selection 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range b1 15 01C4 Frequency Reference Selection 2 Sets the input method for frequency reference 2 0 0 3 This parameter is enabled when the te...

Page 591: ...ncy Reference with a Voltage Signal to Terminal A1 Note You can also use this diagram to wire terminals A2 and A3 Current Input Refer to this table to use a current signal input to one of the MFAI terminals Terminal Signal Level Parameter Settings Note Signal Level Selection Function Selection Gain Bias A2 4 mA to 20 mA H3 09 2 H3 10 0 Frequency Reference H3 11 H3 12 Set DIP switch S1 to I for cur...

Page 592: ...us Modbus Communications Use Run command MEMOBUS Modbus communications which comes standard with the drive to enter the Run command 3 Option PCB Use a communications option card or input option card connected to the drive to enter the Run command Refer to the instruction manual included with the option card to install and set the option card Note If b1 02 3 but no connected option card then oPE05 ...

Page 593: ...perates with reverse operation parameters during reverse operation b1 35 Digital Input Deadband Time No Hex Name Description Default Range b1 35 1117 Expert Digital Input Deadband Time Sets the deadband time for MFDIs 0 0 ms 0 0 to 100 0 ms When the on off time for MFDIs is longer than the time set in b1 35 the drive activates the MFDI Set this parameter to prevent malfunctions caused by relay cha...

Page 594: ...ent 50 0 100 When the DC Injection Braking current is more than 50 the drive decreases the carrier frequency to 1 kHz The motor rated current determines how much DC Injection Braking current that the drive can use The DC Injection Braking current level has an effect on the strength of the magnetic field that locks the motor shaft As the current level increases the motor windings will supply more h...

Page 595: ...early from the setting of b2 08 to the setting of b2 03 as shown in Figure 11 24 Figure 11 24 DC Current Level during DC Injection Braking at Start Note If b2 08 100 flux will develop very slowly When b2 08 0 the DC current level will be the DC Injection current set in b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current If b2 08 is set too high DC Injection Braking at start can cause a large noise Adjust b2 08 to ...

Page 596: ... function set in H2 02 deactivates 0 ms 0 65000 ms b4 07 Terminal M5 M6 ON Delay Time No Hex Name Description Default Range b4 07 0B34 Expert Terminal P2 ON Delay Time Sets the delay time to activate the contact after the function set in H2 03 activates 0 ms 0 65000 ms b4 08 Terminal M5 M6 OFF Delay Time No Hex Name Description Default Range b4 08 0B35 Expert Terminal P2 OFF Delay Time Sets the de...

Page 597: ...on for each motor it is operating To decrease motor speed the Droop control function decreases the speed reference when an increase in the load increases the torque reference To increase motor speed the Droop control function increases the speed reference when a decrease in the load decreases the torque reference The Droop control function adjusts motor speed as the torque reference changes to bal...

Page 598: ...e drive begins Zero Servo once the multi function digital input terminal set for Zero Servo H1 xx 72 switches ON and the motor speed drops below the value set in b2 01 DC Injection Zero SpeedThreshold The drive stops and holds the motor in the Zero Servo start position The drive will continue to hold the motor in position as long as Zero Servo is enabled even if the frequency reference rises above...

Page 599: ...he responsiveness for the Zero Servo function 5 0 100 If the drive is not responsive or if there is too much deviation from the Zero Servo start point when you increase the load increase this setting If oscillation or hunting occurs decrease this setting Note Set C5 xx Automatic Speed Regulator ASR parameters correctly before you adjust the Zero Servo gain When you operate with the Zero Servo comm...

Page 600: ...2 Deceleration Time 1 C1 03 Acceleration Time 2 C1 04 Deceleration Time 2 C1 05 Acceleration Time 3 C1 06 Deceleration Time 3 C1 07 Acceleration Time 4 C1 08 Deceleration Time 4 C1 22 Acceleration Time 1 C1 23 Deceleration Time 1 C1 24 Acceleration Time 2 C1 25 Deceleration Time 2 Note When C1 10 0 Accel Decel Time Setting Units 0 01 s 0 00 to 600 00 s the setting range for acceleration and decele...

Page 601: ...he acceleration and deceleration times for the drive are switched automatically when output frequency reaches the setting value set to C1 11 Accel Decel Time Switchover Freq Set C1 11 0 0 Hz to disable this function Note Acceleration and deceleration times set to MFDIs have priority over the automatic switching by the frequency level set to C1 11 For example if the MFDI terminal set for Accel Dece...

Page 602: ...g Units 0 01 s 0 00 to 600 00 s the setting range is 0 00 to 600 00 s C1 05 Acceleration Time 3 No Hex Name Description Default Range C1 05 0204 RUN Acceleration Time 3 Sets the length of time to accelerate from zero to maximum output frequency 10 0 s 0 0 6000 0 s Note When C1 10 0 Accel Decel Time Setting Units 0 01 s 0 00 to 600 00 s the setting range is 0 00 to 600 00 s C1 06 Deceleration Time ...

Page 603: ... MFDO Function Selection During Fast Stop will be ON during Fast Stop Note Decelerating too quickly can cause an ov Overvoltage fault When ov is detected the drive output will shut off and the motor will coast to stop Set a Fast Stop time in C1 09 that prevents motor coasting and makes sure that the motor stops quickly and safely C1 10 Accel Decel Time Setting Units No Hex Name Description Default...

Page 604: ...UN Acceleration Time 1 Sets the first length of time 3 to accelerate for motor from zero to the maximum output frequency 10 0 s 0 0 6000 0 s C1 23 Deceleration Time 1 No Hex Name Description Default Range C1 23 1560 RUN Deceleration Time 1 Sets the first length of time to decelerate for motor 3 from maximum output frequency to zero 10 0 s 0 0 6000 0 s C1 24 Acceleration Time 2 No Hex Name Descript...

Page 605: ...the S curve deceleration time at start 0 20 s 0 00 10 00 s C2 04 S Curve Time End of Decel No Hex Name Description Default Range C2 04 020E S Curve Time End of Decel Sets the S curve deceleration time at completion 0 00 s 0 00 10 00 s C3 Slip Compensation The Slip Compensation function improves the speed accuracy of an induction motor As loads on induction motors increase motor slip increases and ...

Page 606: ...y time when speed is unstable or when the slip compensation response is too slow Usually it is not necessary to change this setting Determined by A1 02 0 10000 ms Use these settings to adjust this parameter as necessary When the speed is not stable increase the setting When the slip compensation response is too slow decrease the setting C3 03 Slip Compensation Limit No Hex Name Description Default...

Page 607: ... this parameter When this parameter 1 Enabled the output current will increase by 10 at a maximum at rated load before it is enabled Enable this parameter to increase speed precision when you move heavy loads at high speeds in these conditions Power supply voltage is low Motor rated voltage is high Do not enable this parameter in these conditions Operating a motor in the middle speed range or low ...

Page 608: ...ncrease the setting When the slip compensation response is too slow decrease the setting C3 23 Motor 2 Slip Compensation Limit No Hex Name Description Default Range C3 23 0242 Motor 2 Slip Compensation Limit Sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of the motor 2 rated slip 200 0 250 If you increase the value of C3 21 Motor 2 Slip Compensation Gain and the motor spee...

Page 609: ...Freq in 0 1 unit increments Then you must do Rotational Auto Tuning C4 Torque Compensation Torque compensation is a function that increases voltage to increase output torque as compensation for insufficient torque production at start up or low speed operation Voltage drops due to motor winding resistance cause torque generating voltage to decrease which causes insufficient torque If the main circu...

Page 610: ...pensation Gain Sets the gain for motor 2 torque compensation function when using the Motor Switch function 1 00 0 00 2 50 In V f Control or CL V f Control adjust the value in 0 05 unit increments for these conditions When torque is not sufficient during low speed operation of 10 Hz or less increase the setting value When there is vibration in the motor or when the motor hunts when operating the dr...

Page 611: ...activates Determined by A1 02 0 60000 ms C4 19 Torque Ripple Suppress Min Freq No Hex Name Description Default Range C4 19 0B8D Expert Torque Ripple Suppress Min Freq If there is slow oscillation at low speeds adjust this setting Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 0 1 Hz 0 0 10 0 Hz Note Set C4 20 Voltage Compensation Adjust 1 0 to enable this parameter C4 20 Voltage Compensation A...

Page 612: ... AOLV Control Note The detected speed value is the speed estimation value when A1 02 4 Control Method Selection Advanced Open Loop Vector Before Adjusting ASR Parameters Perform Auto Tuning and set up all motor data correctly prior to adjusting ASR parameters Always make adjustments with the load connected to the motor Use analog output signals to monitor U1 16 SFS Output Frequency and U1 05 Motor...

Page 613: ...ed or low speed and decrease C5 02 ASR Integral Time 1 until just before vibration begins to occur 3 Check for any oscillation when running the motor at maximum speed 4 Increase C5 02 and decrease C5 01 if oscillation occurs The adjustment procedure is complete if there is no oscillation 5 Set the low speed gain Run the motor at zero speed or low speed and increase C5 03 ASR Proportional Gain 2 un...

Page 614: ...tting enables monitoring within a range of 10 to 10 V H4 08 Terminal AM Signal Level Select 1 These settings result in the following multi function analog output configuration The multi function analog output common is the terminal AC Terminal FM Outputs the output frequency after SFS within a range of 10 to 10 V 100 to 10 Terminal AM Outputs the motor speed within a range of 10 to 10 V 200 to 200...

Page 615: ...witchover Frequency to switch the ASR proportional gain and ASR integral time in accordance with the output frequency C5 01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 No Hex Name Description Default Range C5 01 021B RUN ASR Proportional Gain 1 Sets the gain to adjust ASR response Determined by A1 02 0 00 300 00 The speed response increases with the weight of the load Usually the gain increases with larger loads Exce...

Page 616: ...illation is a problem decrease C5 01 in 2 unit decrements or decrease C5 06 in 0 001 unit decrements C5 07 ASR Gain Switchover Frequency No Hex Name Description Default Range C5 07 0221 ASR Gain Switchover Frequency Sets the frequency where the drive should switch between C5 01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 and C5 03 ASR Proportional Gain 2 as well as between integral time 1 and 2 C5 02 C5 04 Sets the f...

Page 617: ...ing ASR Tuning C5 21 Motor 2 ASR Proportional Gain 1 No Hex Name Description Default Range C5 21 0356 RUN Motor 2 ASR Proportional Gain 1 Sets the gain to adjust ASR response Determined by E3 01 0 00 300 00 The speed response increases with the weight of the load Usually the gain increases with larger loads Excessive gain causes vibration Note Motor 2 ASR is usually set using C5 21 and C5 22 Motor...

Page 618: ...ssary to increase the setting for correct motor speed control Use U6 04 ASR Output to make sure that ASR is operating at the limit set in this parameter When ASR is operating at the limit correctly set the PG signal and these parameters before you make changes to C5 25 F1 31 Encoder 2 Pulse Count PPR F1 33 Encoder 2 Gear Teeth 1 F1 34 Encoder 2 Gear Teeth 2 C5 26 Motor 2 ASR Delay Time No Hex Name...

Page 619: ...ossible during acceleration or deceleration set this parameter to 1 Note If you enable integral control overshoot or undershoot can occur when acceleration or deceleration complete If there are problems with overshooting and undershooting set this parameter to 0 0 Disabled Integral operation is not enabled during acceleration or deceleration Integral operation is always enabled during constant spe...

Page 620: ...t the selection of drive duty rating selection of carrier frequency and upper and lower limits of carrier frequencies C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range C6 02 0224 Carrier Frequency Selection Sets the switching frequency carrier frequency for the transistors in the drive Determined by A1 02 and o2 04 1 6 F Changes to the switching frequency will decrease audibl...

Page 621: ...Variable Carrier Frequency to Agree with the Output Frequency Note When C6 05 7 the drive disables C6 04 The carrier frequency is fixed to the value set to C6 03 The drive detects oPE11 Carrier Frequency Setting Error when these conditions are correct at the same time C6 05 6 C6 04 C6 03 C6 04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit No Hex Name Description Default Range C6 04 0226 Carrier Frequency Lower Li...

Page 622: ...eed Operation The drive has a multi step speed operation function that can set many frequency references in advance Set frequency references in parameter d1 xx You can select the set frequency references with MFDI signals from an external source Activate and deactivate the digital input to select the frequency reference to change the motor speed in steps You can use the 16 step frequency reference...

Page 623: ...value of d1 02 Reference 2 3 Reference 3 1 Set H3 10 F Terminal A2 Function Selection Not Used and disables the analog reference 2 Set the value of d1 03 Reference 3 4 Reference 4 Set the value of d1 04 Reference 4 5 Reference 5 to 16 Set the values of d1 05 to d1 16 Reference 5 to 16 using the same procedure 6 Jog Reference Set d1 17 Jog Reference to the jog speed 7 External digital input 4 input...

Page 624: ...Note The upper limit value changes when the E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency and d2 01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit values change Calculate the upper limit value with this formula Upper limit value E1 04 d2 01 100 To set d1 01 to 1 step speed parameter in a multi step speed operation set b1 01 0 Frequency Reference Selection 1 Keypad d1 02 Reference 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range d1 02 0...

Page 625: ...rence 5 Sets the frequency reference in the units from o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection 0 00 Hz 0 00 590 00 Hz Note The upper limit value changes when the E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency and d2 01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit values change Parameter d1 05 sets the frequency reference of Multi Step Speed 5 d1 06 Reference 6 No Hex Name Description Default Range d1 06 0285 RUN Reference 6 Se...

Page 626: ...quency Display Unit Selection 0 00 Hz 0 00 590 00 Hz Note On drives with software versions PRG 01021 and later this function is enabled The PRG column on the nameplate on the right side of the drive identifies the software version You can also use U1 25 SoftwareNumber FLASH to identify the software version The upper limit value changes when the E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency and d2 01 Frequency Re...

Page 627: ...s the frequency reference in the units from o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection 0 00 Hz 0 00 590 00 Hz Note On drives with software versions PRG 01021 and later this function is enabled The PRG column on the nameplate on the right side of the drive identifies the software version You can also use U1 25 SoftwareNumber FLASH to identify the software version The upper limit value changes when the ...

Page 628: ...with the gears and bearings The upper frequency limit is set in d2 01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit and the lower limit is set in d2 02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit Figure 11 43 Upper and Lower Frequency Limits d2 01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit No Hex Name Description Default Range d2 01 0289 Frequency Reference Upper Limit Sets maximum limit for all frequency references The maximum outpu...

Page 629: ... that is the same as or near the Jump frequency width the frequency reference changes automatically The drive accelerates or decelerates the motor smoothly until the frequency reference is not in the range of the Jump frequency band The drive will use the active accel decel time to go through the specified dead band range If the frequency reference is not in the range of the Jump frequency band sw...

Page 630: ...n MFDI to momentarily stop the acceleration deceleration of the motor and continues to operate the motor at the output frequency at which the command reference was input Turn OFF the acceleration deceleration ramp hold command to continue acceleration deceleration With a crane for example use the function and a 2 stage push button to stop acceleration and operate at low speed with one of the outpu...

Page 631: ...alue between d2 02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit and an analog input programmed for Frequency Reference H3 02 H3 06 H3 10 0 sets the lower frequency reference limit Note When you use External Reference 1 2 Selection H1 xx 2 to switch between the Up Down function and an analog input as the reference source the analog value becomes the lower reference limit when the Up Down command is active Set d...

Page 632: ...ffset values together Figure 11 46 shows the Offset frequency function Figure 11 46 Offset Frequency Operation d7 01 Offset Frequency 1 No Hex Name Description Default Range d7 01 02B2 RUN Offset Frequency 1 Sets the value to add to or subtract from the frequency reference when H1 xx 44 MFDI Function Select Add Offset Frequency 1 d7 01 as a percentage of the maximum output frequency 0 0 100 0 100 ...

Page 633: ...purpose applications This pattern is used when the load torque is constant without any rotation speed such as that used for linear conveyor systems 1 Const Trq 60Hz base 60Hz max 2 Const Trq 50Hz base 60Hz max 3 Const Trq 60Hz base 72Hz max 4 VT 50Hz 65 Vmid reduction Derated torque characteristics This pattern is used for torque loads proportional to 2 or 3 times the rotation speed such as is the...

Page 634: ...lues Related to the Drive Input Voltage The value set in E1 01 is the base value that the drive uses for the motor protective functions shown in this table With a 400 V class drive the detection level changes for some motor protective functions Voltage E1 01 Setting Approximate Values ov Detection Level BTR Operation Level rr Detection Level 1 L2 05 Undervoltage Detection Lvl Uv1 L3 17 DC Bus Regu...

Page 635: ...ent those when using 200 V class drives Double the values for 400 V class drives 2003 2018 4002 4009 2025 2180 4015 4091 2215 2415 4112 4605 2 Const Trq 50Hz base 60Hz max For general purpose applications This pattern is used when the load torque is constant without any rotation speed such as that used for linear conveyor systems Note The voltage values in the figure represent those when using 200...

Page 636: ... voltage values in the figure represent those when using 200 V class drives Double the values for 400 V class drives 2003 2018 4002 4009 2025 2180 4015 4091 2215 2415 4112 4605 6 VT 60Hz 65 Vmid reduction This derated torque characteristics pattern is used for torque loads proportional to three times the rotation speed such as is the case with fans and pumps Note The voltage values in the figure r...

Page 637: ... Trq 50Hz 65 Vmin boost This pattern is used when strong torque is required during startup Select this pattern only in the following circumstances Wiring distance between the drive and motor is at least 150 m An AC reactor is connected to the drive output Note The voltage values in the figure represent those when using 200 V class drives Double the values for 400 V class drives 2003 2018 4002 4009...

Page 638: ... 2025 2180 4015 4091 2215 2415 4112 4605 C Const Trq 60 Hz base 90 Hz max This pattern is used to rotate motors at greater than 60 Hz Output voltage is constant when operating at greater than 60 Hz Note The voltage values in the figure represent those when using 200 V class drives Double the values for 400 V class drives 2003 2018 4002 4009 2025 2180 4015 4091 2215 2415 4112 4605 D Const Trq 60 Hz...

Page 639: ...maximum output voltage for the V f pattern 200 0 200 V Class 0 0 255 0 V 400 V Class 0 0 510 0 V E1 06 Base Frequency No Hex Name Description Default Range E1 06 0305 Base Frequency Sets the base frequency for the V f pattern Determined by A1 02 0 0 E1 04 E1 07 Mid Point A Frequency No Hex Name Description Default Range E1 07 0306 Mid Point A Frequency Sets a middle output frequency for the V f pa...

Page 640: ... 0 0 510 0 V Note After Auto Tuning the value of E1 13 E1 05 Maximum Output Voltage When E1 13 0 0 use the value of E1 05 to control the voltage E1 14 Middle Out Freq Volt Select 1 No Hex Name Description Default Range E1 14 034C Middle Out Freq Volt Select 1 Sets the mid point A voltage for reverse run used when b1 23 1 Selection REV Parameters Enabled Determined by A1 02 and E1 03 200 V Class 0 ...

Page 641: ...lt Range E1 20 0BF3 UL Motor1 Sel Sets the motor characteristics 2 0 2 0 Constant Torque 1 Variable Torque 2 Auto Distinction E2 Motor Parameters E2 parameters Motor Parameters are used to set induction motor data To switch drive operation from one motor to another motor set the first motor motor 1 Performing Auto Tuning automatically sets the E2 parameters to the optimal values If Auto Tuning can...

Page 642: ...to receive a copy of the motor test report Note The default setting of the no load current is for performance with a 4 pole motor recommended by Yaskawa E2 04 Motor Pole Count No Hex Name Description Default Range E2 04 0311 Motor Pole Count Sets the number of motor poles 4 2 120 Note When A1 02 0 1 3 Control Method Selection V f CL V f CLV the maximum value is 120 When A1 02 2 4 OLV AOLV the maxi...

Page 643: ... E2 07 0 75 The drive uses this coefficient when it operates with constant output The drive uses this coefficient when it operates the motor in the constant output range E2 09 Motor Mechanical Loss No Hex Name Description Default Range E2 09 0316 Expert Motor Mechanical Loss Sets the mechanical loss of the motor It is set as a percentage of E2 11 Motor Rated Power Usually it is not necessary to ch...

Page 644: ...s When you use A1 03 Initialize Parameters to initialize the drive the drive will reset the manually set values for E3 04 to E3 13 Motor 2 Base Voltage to default values E3 01 Motor 2 Control Mode Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range E3 01 0319 Motor 2 Control Mode Selection Sets the control method for motor 2 2 0 3 Note Changing the motor 2 control mode selection changes the settings v...

Page 645: ...he motor 2 V f pattern Determined by E3 01 200 V Class 0 0 255 0 V 400 V Class 0 0 510 0 V E3 11 Motor 2 Mid Point B Frequency No Hex Name Description Default Range E3 11 0345 Expert Motor 2 Mid Point B Frequency Sets a middle output frequency for the motor 2 V f pattern Set this parameter to adjust the V f pattern for the constant output range Usually it is not necessary to change this parameter ...

Page 646: ...n used when b1 23 1 Selection REV Parameters Enabled Determined by E3 01 and E1 03 200 V Class 0 0 to 255 0 V 400 V Class 0 0 to 510 0 V E3 20 UL Motor2 Sel No Hex Name Description Default Range E3 20 0BF4 UL Motor2 Sel Sets the motor characteristics 2 0 2 0 Constant Torque 1 Variable Torque 2 Auto Distinction E4 Motor 2 Parameters E4 parameters Motor 2 Parameters set induction motor data To switc...

Page 647: ...ring the Auto Tuning process Rotational Auto Tuning and Stationary Auto Tuning The motor no load current listed in the motor test report can also be entered to E2 03 manually Contact the motor manufacturer to receive a copy of the motor test report Note The default setting of the no load current is for performance with a 4 pole motor recommended by Yaskawa E4 04 Motor 2 Motor Poles No Hex Name Des...

Page 648: ...7 0 75 The drive sets this parameter during Rotational Auto Tuning The drive uses this value when it operates the motor in the constant output range E4 09 Motor 2 Mechanical Loss No Hex Name Description Default Range E4 09 033F Expert Motor 2 Mechanical Loss Sets the mechanical loss of motor 2 It is set as a percentage of E4 11 Motor 2 Rated Power Usually it is not necessary to change this setting...

Page 649: ...Mid Point A Frequency Sets the middle output frequency used for motor 3 Determined by E1 03 0 0 E7 04 E7 08 Motor 3 Mid Point A Voltage No Hex Name Description Default Range E7 08 1B65 Motor 3 Mid Point A Voltage Sets the middle output frequency voltage used for motor 3 Determined by E1 03 200 V Class 0 0 255 0 V 400 V Class 0 0 510 0 V E7 09 Motor 3 Minimum Output Frequency No Hex Name Descriptio...

Page 650: ...rent Sets the motor rated current for motor 3 in amperes Determined by o2 04 10 to 200 of the drive rated current E7 24 Motor 3 Motor Poles No Hex Name Description Default Range E7 24 1B75 Motor 3 Motor Poles Sets the number of poles for motor 3 4 2 48 E7 25 Motor 3 Line to Line Resistance No Hex Name Description Default Range E7 25 1B76 Motor 3 Line to Line Resistance Sets the line to line resist...

Page 651: ...or death WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard Make sure that the host controller circuitry has correct safety design that will let you keep control of the motor if the drive loses speed feedback If you do not have control of the motor it can cause serious injury or death Table 11 18 Encoder Option Card Setting Parameters Setting Parameter Encoder Option Card PG B3 PG X3 PG RT3 F1 01 x x F1 02 x x x F1 0...

Page 652: ... switches ON 4 No Alarm Display Operation continues without showing PGo on the keypad Due to potential damage to motor and machinery refrain from using this setting except under special circumstances F1 03 Overspeed Detection Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range F1 03 0382 Overspeed Detection Selection Selects the motor operation when the drive detects oS Overspeed 1 0 3 The drive detec...

Page 653: ...nual included with the option card for more information on how to confirm and set the encoder pulse output sequence 0 Pulse A leads in FWD Direction 1 Pulse B leads in FWD Direction F1 06 Encoder 1 Pulse Monitor Scaling No Hex Name Description Default Range F1 06 0385 Encoder 1 Pulse Monitor Scaling Sets the ratio between the pulse input and the pulse output of the encoder as a 3 digit number The ...

Page 654: ...nge F1 12 038B Encoder 1 Gear Teeth 1 Sets the number of gear teeth on the motor side This parameter and F1 13 Encoder 1 Gear Teeth 2 set the gear ratio between the motor and encoder 0 0 1000 After you set the number of gear teeth the drive uses this formula to calculate the motor speed Note When F1 12 0 or F1 13 0 the gear ratio is 1 F1 13 Encoder 1 Gear Teeth 2 No Hex Name Description Default Ra...

Page 655: ...r 2 is received by two PG option cards independently F1 31 Encoder 2 Pulse Count PPR No Hex Name Description Default Range F1 31 03B0 Encoder 2 Pulse Count PPR Sets the number of output pulses per revolution of the encoder This parameter is for motor 2 1024 1 60000 ppr F1 32 PG 2 Rotation Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range F1 32 03B1 Encoder 2 Rotation Selection Sets the output sequen...

Page 656: ... Range F1 36 03B5 Encoder 2 PCB Disconnect Detect Sets the function that enables and disables detection of a disconnected PG X3 encoder connection cable PGoH Encoder PG Hardware Fault is detected when this parameter is enabled This parameter is for motor 2 1 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled F1 37 Encoder 2 Signal Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range F1 37 03BD Encoder 2 Signal Selection Sets th...

Page 657: ...og Input to set inputs individually If F2 01 0 and b1 01 3 Option PCB the drive will detect oPE05 Run Cmd Freq Ref Source Sel Err Figure 11 49 shows the individual input of analog inputs H3 xx parameters set the function to input the analog reference received from the AI A3 card and to adjust the gain and bias of these signals Figure 11 49 Analog Input Reference Individual Input Block Diagram 1 3 ...

Page 658: ...d Gain Sets the analog reference gain as a percentage when the maximum output frequency is 100 100 0 999 9 999 9 Note Set F2 01 1 Analog Input Function Selection 3 Channels Added Together to enable this function F2 03 Analog Input Option Card Bias No Hex Name Description Default Range F2 03 0369 RUN Analog Input Option Card Bias Sets the analog reference bias as a percentage when the maximum outpu...

Page 659: ...7 01 to H7 04 Virtual Multi Function Inputs 1 to 4 F3 01 Digital Input Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range F3 01 0390 Digital Input Function Selection Sets the data format of digital input signals This parameter is enabled when o1 03 0 or 1 Frequency Display Unit Selection 0 01 Hz or 0 01 100 E1 04 0 0 8 Note When o1 03 2 min 1 r min unit or 3 User Units the input signal type ...

Page 660: ...eath connection terminal ungrounded FE Cable sheath connection terminal grounded 1 Setting F3 03 2 Digital Input Data Length Select 16 bit enables F3 01 6 Digital Input Function Selection BCD 5 digit 0 01 Hz and a frequency between 0 00 Hz to 399 8 Hz can be set by the BCD Note that terminal SI is also used as for data bits Negative commands cannot be input as encoding information positive negativ...

Page 661: ...on Selection Multi Function Digital Input F 0 1FF F3 16 Terminal D6 Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range F3 16 0BE9 Expert Terminal D6 Function Selection Sets the function for terminal D6 of the DI A3 option when F3 01 8 Digital Input Function Selection Multi Function Digital Input F 0 1FF F3 17 Terminal D7 Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range F3 17 0BEA Exp...

Page 662: ...Digital Input F 0 1FF F3 25 Terminal DF Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range F3 25 0BF2 Expert Terminal DF Function Selection Sets the function for terminal DF of the DI A3 when F3 01 8 Digital Input Function Selection Multi Function Digital Input F 0 1FF F4 Analog Monitor Option F4 parameters set drive operation when you use analog monitor option card AO A3 The AO A3 card has ...

Page 663: ...communication option to set the terminal V1 output level from the PLC F4 02 Terminal V1 Gain No Hex Name Description Default Range F4 02 0392 RUN Terminal V1 Gain Sets the gain of the monitor signal that is sent from terminal V1 Sets the analog signal output level from the terminal V1 at 10 Vor 20 mA as 100 when an output for monitoring items is 100 100 0 999 9 999 9 The maximum output voltage out...

Page 664: ...s 0 this parameter sets the analog signal output level from the V1 terminal as a percentage of 10 Vor 20 mA 0 0 999 9 999 9 The maximum output voltage output from terminal V1 is 10 V Use F4 07 Terminal V1 Signal Level to set the signal level F4 06 Terminal V2 Bias No Hex Name Description Default Range F4 06 0396 RUN Terminal V2 Bias Sets the bias of the monitor signal that is sent from terminal V2...

Page 665: ...1 PC Function Select P2 PC ov Overvoltage Depending on the setting of F5 02 Terminal P2 PC Function Select P3 PC oL2 Drive Overloaded or oH2 External Overheat H1 XX B Depending on the setting of F5 03 Terminal P3 PC Function Select P4 PC Not used Depending on the setting of F5 04 Terminal P4 PC Function Select P5 PC oS Overspeed Zero speed detection in progress Depending on the setting of F5 05 Te...

Page 666: ... PC Function Select Sets the function of terminal P2 PC on the DO A3 option Set F5 09 2 DO A3 Output Mode Selection Programmable F5 01 to F5 08 to enable this function 1 0 1FF F5 03 Terminal P3 PC Function Select No Hex Name Description Default Range F5 03 039B Terminal P3 PC Function Select Sets the function of terminal P3 PC on the DO A3 option Set F5 09 2 DO A3 Output Mode Selection Programmabl...

Page 667: ...ommunication Options F6 and F7 parameters are used to set the basic communication settings and method of fault detection for the communication option card The communication option card parameters include common option card parameters and communication protocol specific parameters The following table lists the parameters that need to be set for each communication option card Refer to the technical ...

Page 668: ...Fault relay output terminal MA MC will turn ON and MB MC will turn OFF 1 Coast to Stop The drive output shuts off and the motor coasts to stop Fault relay output terminal MA MC will turn ON and MB MC will turn OFF 2 Fast Stop Use C1 09 The drive stops the motor using the deceleration time set in C1 09 Fast Stop Time Fault relay output terminal MA MC will turn ON and MB MC will turn OFF 3 Alarm Onl...

Page 669: ...l turn OFF 3 Alarm Only The keypad shows EF0 and the drive continues operation Note Prepare safety protection equipment and systems such as fast stop switches separately The output terminal set for Alarm H2 01 to H2 05 10 switches ON F6 04 bUS Error Detection Time No Hex Name Description Default Range F6 04 03A5 bUS Error Detection Time Sets the delay time for the drive to detect bUS Option Commun...

Page 670: ...e drive after you change the parameter setting 0 0 64 Note Be sure to set a node address that is different than all other node addresses Do not set this parameter to 0 Incorrect parameter settings will cause AEr Station Address Setting Error errors and the L ERR LED on the option will come on When the only drive is connected you can connect a maximum of 42 nodes Follow these rules to connect devic...

Page 671: ...he same value on both the master drive and slave drives The following example illustrates the parameter settings when connecting four slave drives F6 16 Gateway Mode H5 01 Drive Node Address H5 02 Communica tion Speed Selection H5 03 Communica tion Parity Selection H5 06 Drive Transmit Wait Time H5 09 CE Detection Time b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection 1 b1 02 Run Command Selection 1 Drive0 Mast...

Page 672: ... Update Register Access Command Enabled bit 5 F Reserved 2 Run Command Drive 1 15C6H bit 0 Forward run Stop 1 Forward run 0 Stop bit 1 Reverse run Stop 1 Reverse run 0 Stop bit 2 External Fault bit 3 Fault Reset bit 4 ComRef bit 5 ComCtrl bit 6 F Reserved 3 Frequency Reference Drive 1 15C7H The unit of measure varies depending on the setting of o1 03 4 Run Command Drive 2 15C8H 5 Frequency Referen...

Page 673: ... Frequency Drive Status Bit 4 1 Frequency Reference The unit of measure varies depending on the setting of o1 03 3 Drive Status Drive 2 15E9H 4 Output frequency or frequency reference Drive Status Bit 4 ON Drive 2 15EAH 5 Drive Status Drive 3 15EBH 6 Output frequency or frequency reference Drive Status Bit 4 ON Drive 3 15ECH 7 Drive Status Drive 4 15EDH 8 Output frequency or frequency reference Dr...

Page 674: ... register used for the monitor functions of INV_CTL drive operation control command and INV_I O drive I O control command Restart the drive after you change the parameter setting 0000h 0000h FFFFh To enable the MEMOBUS register set in F6 23 set SEL_MON2 1 to 0EH or set SEL_MON 3 4 and SEL_MON 5 6 to 0EH Bytes of the response data enable the MEMOBUS register content that was set in F6 23 F6 24 MECH...

Page 675: ...at is different than all other node addresses Node addresses 0 1 and 2 are usually reserved for control maintenance and device self diagnosis F6 31 PROFIBUS DP Clear Mode Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range F6 31 03CC PROFIBUS DP Clear Mode Selection Sets what the drive will do after it receives the Clear Mode command 0 0 1 0 Reset Resets drive settings for example frequency reference ...

Page 676: ...cts the network communication speed and automatically adjusts the communications speed 1 10 kbps 2 20 kbps 3 50 kbps 4 125 kbps 5 250 kbps 6 500 kbps 7 800 kbps 8 1 Mbps F6 50 DeviceNet MAC Address No Hex Name Description Default Range F6 50 03C1 DeviceNet MAC Address Sets the MAC address for DeviceNet communication Restart the drive after you change this parameter setting 0 0 64 Note Set a MAC ad...

Page 677: ... Fault Detection Sets the function to detect EF0 Option Card External Fault when the drive does not receive data from the DeviceNet master 0 0 4 0 Enabled 1 Disabled No Fault Detection Does not detect EF0 issues 2 Vendor Specific 3 RUN Forward 4 RUN Reverse F6 55 DeviceNet Baud Rate Monitor No Hex Name Description Default Range F6 55 03C6 DeviceNet Baud Rate Monitor Sets the function to see the ac...

Page 678: ...parameter to 0 to disable the heartbeat function 0 0 10 F6 63 DeviceNet Network MAC ID No Hex Name Description Default Range F6 63 03DE DeviceNet Network MAC ID Sets the function to see the actual DeviceNet MAC address using the keypad This parameter functions as a monitor only 0 0 63 F6 64 to F6 67 Dynamic Out Assembly 109 Param1 to 4 No Hex Name Description Default Range F6 64 to F6 67 03DF 03E2...

Page 679: ...No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 03 03E7 IP Address 3 Sets the third octet of the IP Address for the device that is connecting to the network Restart the drive after you change this parameter 1 0 255 Note When F7 13 0 Address Mode at Startup Static Use parameters F7 01 to F7 04 IPAddress 1 to 4 to set the IP Address Be sure to set a different IP address for each drive on the network Also s...

Page 680: ...ay Address 1 Sets the first octet of the gateway address of the connected network 192 0 255 Note Set this parameter when F7 13 0 Address Mode at Startup Static F7 10 Gateway Address 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 10 03EE Gateway Address 2 Sets the second octet of the gateway address of the connected network 168 0 255 Note Set this parameter when F7 13 0 Address Mode at Startup Static F...

Page 681: ...uto 2 Full Full 3 Half Auto Port 1 is set to Half and port 2 is set to Auto 4 Half Full Port 1 is set to Half and port 2 is set to Full 5 Auto Half Port 1 is set to Auto and port 2 is set to Half 6 Auto Full Port 1 is set to Auto and port 2 is set to Full 7 Full Half Port 1 is set to Full and port 2 is set to Half 8 Full Auto Port 1 is set to Full and port 2 is set to Auto F7 15 Communication Spee...

Page 682: ...ame Description Default Range F7 22 03FA EtherNet IP Time Scaling Sets the scaling factor for the time monitor in the EtherNet IP Class ID 2AH Object 0 15 15 F7 23 to F7 32 Dynamic Out Param 1 to 10 for CommCard No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 23 to F7 27 03FB 03FF F7 28 to F7 32 0370 0374 Dynamic Out Param 1 to 10 for CommCard When you use an Ethernet IP option sets Output Assembly 116 T...

Page 683: ... operation to the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 F7 64 PZD5 Write No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 64 0784 PZD5 Write When you use a Profibus option sets the MEMOBUS Modbus address for PZD5 PPO output A value of 0 1 or 2 will disable the PZD5 PPO output write operation to the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 F7 65 PZD6 Write No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 65 0785 PZD6 Write When you use a Pr...

Page 684: ... input functions as the HIW when F7 71 0 0 F7 72 PZD3 Read No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 72 078C PZD3 Read When you use a Profibus option sets the MEMOBUS Modbus address for PZD3 PPO input A value of 0 will disable the PZD3 PPO input load operation from the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 F7 73 PZD4 Read No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 73 078D PZD4 Read When you use a Profibus option...

Page 685: ...O input A value of 0 will disable the PZD8 PPO input load operation from the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 F7 78 PZD9 Read No Hex Name Description Default Range F7 78 0792 PZD9 Read When you use a Profibus option sets the MEMOBUS Modbus address for PZD9 PPO input A value of 0 will disable the PZD9 PPO input load operation from the MEMOBUS Modbus register 0 F7 79 PZD10 Read No Hex Name Description Defa...

Page 686: ...to set the function Table 11 26 MFDI Setting Values Setting Value Function 0 Brake Release Check 2 External Reference 1 2 Selection 3 Multi Step Speed Reference 1 4 Multi Step Speed Reference 2 5 Multi Step Speed Reference 3 6 Jog Reference Selection 7 Accel Decel Time Selection 1 8 1 Baseblock Command N O 9 1 Baseblock Command N C A Accel Decel Ramp Hold B Overheat Alarm oH2 C Analog Terminal Ena...

Page 687: ...or MFDI terminal S3 24 0 1FF H1 04 Terminal S4 Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range H1 04 0401 Terminal S4 Function Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S4 14 0 1FF H1 05 Terminal S5 Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range H1 05 0402 Terminal S5 Function Selection Sets the function for MFDI terminal S5 0 0 1FF H1 06 Terminal S6 Function Selection No He...

Page 688: ...on Selection and the function assigned to H1 22 simultaneously if the MFDI terminal S2 is turned ON When you set F the function will be disabled H1 23 Terminal S3 Function Select 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range H1 23 0B72 Terminal S3 Function Select 2 Sets the second function for MFDI terminal S3 F 0 1FF Operates the function assigned to H1 03 Terminal S3 Function Selection and the functio...

Page 689: ...ction Select 2 Sets the second function for MFDI terminal S8 F 0 1FF Operates the function set to H1 08 Terminal S8 Function Selection and the function set to H1 28 simultaneously if MFDI terminal S8 is turned ON When you set F the function will be disabled H1 29 Terminal S9 Function Select 2 No Hex Name Description Default Range H1 29 0B78 Terminal S9 Function Select 2 Sets the second function fo...

Page 690: ...unction set to H1 01 to H1 10 0 Brake Release Check Setting Value Function Description 0 Brake Release Check Set the wiring sequence to turn ON the brake release check when the brake release command turns ON 2 External Reference 1 2 Selection Setting Value Function Description 2 External Reference 1 2 Selection Sets the drive to use Run command source 1 2 or Reference command source 1 2 when in RE...

Page 691: ...to stop when a baseblock command N O is input The keypad flashes bb Baseblock Acceleration always starts from the zero speed when the Run command is input The drive keeps the baseblock state when the Run command is not input WARNING Sudden Movement Hazard When you use a mechanical holding brake with the drive in a lifting application you must close the brake if an input terminal triggers the Baseb...

Page 692: ... Terminal Enable Selection Setting Value Function Description C Analog Terminal Enable Selection Sets the command that enables or disables the terminals selected in H3 14 Analog Input Terminal Enable Sel ON Terminal selected with H3 14 is enabled OFF Terminal selected with H3 14 is disabled D Ignore Speed Fdbk V f w o Enc Setting Value Function Description D Ignore Speed Fdbk V f w o Enc Sets the ...

Page 693: ...ons and Up Down Commands When the Run command is cleared or when the drive is restarted when d4 01 0 Freq Reference Retention Function Disabled the Up Down command will reset to 0 When parameter d4 01 1 Enabled the drive saves the frequency reference set during the Up Down command If the Run command is cycled or the drive is restarted the drive stores the frequency reference value and restarts the...

Page 694: ...mmand or Down command has been set oPE03 Multi Function Input Setting Err will be detected If two or more of the following functions have been allocated at the same time oPE03 occurs Up Down command Accel Decel Ramp Hold Reference Sample Hold Offset Frequency 1 2 3 addition The Up Down command can be used when the keypad is in REMOTE mode or b1 01 0 Frequency Reference Selection 1 Keypad The Up Do...

Page 695: ...rive detects a fault for which you can set the stopping method apply the appropriate Stopping Method Then push RESET on the keypad to turn the Run command OFF or activate the fault reset terminal to reset the fault Note The drive ignores the fault reset command when the Run command is active Remove the Run command before trying to reset a fault 15 Fast Stop N O Setting Value Function Description 1...

Page 696: ...t 15 Fast Stop N O Refer to C1 09 Fast Stop Time on page 603 for more information Set C1 09 Fast Stop Time to a correct deceleration time If the deceleration time is too short it can cause an overvoltage fault and failure to stop the motor from coasting Figure 11 54 shows an example of how fast stop operates Figure 11 54 Fast Stop Time Chart 1A Accel Decel Time Selection 2 Setting Value Function D...

Page 697: ...ecel Ramp Hold H1 xx 10 or 11 Up Command or Down Command H1 xx 44 to 46 Offset frequency 20 to 2F External Fault Setting Value Function Description 20 to 2F External Fault Sets a command to stop the drive when a failure or fault occurs on an external device If an external fault is input to the drive the keypad will show EFx External Fault Terminal Sx where x is the number of the terminal terminal ...

Page 698: ...requency becomes 0 If you turn on a terminal while a motor rotates in reverse the motor will not stop ON Disables the forward operation Run command OFF Enables the forward operation Run command Note Refer to Travel Limit Function on page 215 for details 32 Forward Travel Limit N C Setting Value Function Description 32 Forward Travel Limit N C If you turn off a terminal while a motor rotates forwar...

Page 699: ... Enabled Enables or disables the selection of Light Load Accel 2 Enabled function ON Enabled OFF Disabled Note Refer to Light load Acceleration 2 Function on page 210 for details 37 Multi Step Speed Reference 4 Setting Value Function Description 37 Multi Step Speed Reference 4 Uses speed references d1 01 to d1 16 to set a multi step speed reference Note On drives with software versions PRG 01021 a...

Page 700: ...to stop The Forward run Reverse run command is set to terminals S1 and S2 when the drive is initialized using a 2 wire sequence 41 Reverse RUN 2 Wire Setting Value Function Description 41 Reverse RUN 2 Wire Input the Reverse run command for 2 wire sequence 1 Use it paired with the Forward Run Command 2 Wire Seq H1 xx 40 ON Reverse Run OFF Run Stop Note When the both Forward run command and Reverse...

Page 701: ...an communicate correctly Note Refer to MEMOBUS Modbus communications Self Diagnostics for the self diagnostics procedure 72 Zero Servo Setting Value Function Description 72 Zero Servo Sets the function to hold a stopped motor This function will hold a stopped motor if an external force is applied or an analog reference is offset Note Refer to b9 Zero Servo for more information When you use the Zer...

Page 702: ...eblock N C 1C Motor 2 Selection 1D During Regeneration 1F Motor Overload Alarm oL1 20 Drive Overheat Pre Alarm oH Setting Value Function 21 Brake Release Command 22 Overload Detection N O 23 Weight Det N C 2F Maintenance Notification 30 During Torque Limit 33 Zero Servo Complete 37 During Frequency Output 39 Watt Hour Pulse Output 3C LOCAL Control Selected 4C During Fast Stop 4D oH Pre Alarm Reduc...

Page 703: ...performed with H2 60 H2 63 H2 66 H2 69 and H2 72 Digital Output 1 Secondary Func to Digital Output 5 Secondary Func Sets the logical operation with H2 61 H2 64 H2 67 H2 70 and H2 73 Digital Output 1 Logical Operation to Digital Output 5 Logical Operation Figure 11 57 Functional Block Diagram of Logical Operation Output for MFDO 1 Table 11 31 MFDO Logical Operation Table Logical Operation Selection...

Page 704: ... use the terminal in through mode H2 04 Term P1 C1 Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 04 040E Term P1 C1 Function Selection Sets the function for MFDO terminal P1 C1 6 0 1FF Note Set this parameter to F when not using the terminal or to use the terminal in through mode H2 05 Term P2 C2 Function Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 05 040F Term P2 C2 Function ...

Page 705: ...lect No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 08 0B3B Modbus Register 1 Bit Select Sets the bit of the MEMOBUS Modbus register output to the MFDO terminal 0000 0000 FFFF Sets H2 07 with the address of the register that is output to Modbus Reg 1 Status Satisfied H2 01 to H2 05 62 and sets H2 08 with the bit value H2 09 Modbus Register 2 Address Select No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 09 0B3...

Page 706: ...e analog output for the monitor selected in H2 20 Comparator 1 Monitor Selection is the 100 value 0 0 0 0 300 0 Note For information on the comparator function refer to 66 Comparator1 on page 722 and 67 Comparator2 on page 722 H2 23 Comparator 1 Hysteresis No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 23 1543 Comparator 1 Hysteresis Sets the hysteresis level for comparator 1 as a percentage of the full...

Page 707: ...ets the upper limit detection level for comparator 2 as a percentage of the full scale analog output for the monitor selected in H2 26 Comparator 2 Monitor Selection 0 0 0 0 300 0 Note For information on the comparator function refer to 66 Comparator1 on page 722 and 67 Comparator2 on page 722 H2 29 Comparator 2 Hysteresis No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 29 1549 Comparator 2 Hysteresis Se...

Page 708: ...Only The keypad shows CP1 and the drive continues operation The output terminal set for Alarm H2 01 to H2 05 10 switches ON 4 Operate at Reduced Speed L8 19 H2 34 Comparator 2 Filter Time No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 34 159C Comparator 2 Filter Time Sets the time constant that is applied to the primary delay filter used for the analog output of the monitor selected with H2 26 Comparato...

Page 709: ...tion Default Range H2 40 0B58 Mbus Reg 15E0h bit0 Output Func Sets the MFDO for bit 0 of MEMOBUS register 15E0 Hex F 0 1FF H2 41 Mbus Reg 15E0h bit1 Output Func No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 41 0B59 Mbus Reg 15E0h bit1 Output Func Sets the MFDO for bit 1 of MEMOBUS register 15E0 Hex F 0 1FF H2 42 Mbus Reg 15E0h bit2 Output Func No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 42 0B5A Mbus Reg 1...

Page 710: ...ption Default Range H2 65 1B4B Expert Terminal M3 M4 Delay Time Sets the minimum on time used to output the logical calculation results from terminal M3 M4 0 1 s 0 0 25 0 s H2 66 Term M5 M6 Secondary Function No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 66 1B4C Expert Term M5 M6 Secondary Function Sets the second function for terminal M5 M6 Outputs the logical calculation results of the terminals assi...

Page 711: ...on results from terminal P1 C1 0 1 s 0 0 25 0 s H2 72 Digital Output 5 Secondary Func No Hex Name Description Default Range H2 72 11FB Expert Digital Output 5 Secondary Func Sets the second function for terminal P2 C2 The logical calculation results of the terminals assigned to functions by H2 05 Term P2 C2 Function Selection is output F 0 FF H2 73 DigitalOutput5 Logical Operation No Hex Name Desc...

Page 712: ...d Loop V f Control E1 09 2 Open Loop Vector Control b2 01 3 Closed Loop Vector Control E1 09 4 Advanced Open Loop Vector Control E1 09 Figure 11 60 Zero Speed Time Chart ON The output frequency is less than the value of E1 09 or b2 01 OFF The output frequency is the value of E1 09 or more or b2 01 or more 2 Speed Agree 1 Setting Value Function Description 2 Speed Agree 1 The terminal deactivates w...

Page 713: ... when A1 02 4 Control Method Selection AOLV and n4 72 1 Speed Feedback Mode With Encoder ON The output frequency is in the range of L4 01 L4 02 and the range of frequency reference L4 02 OFF The output frequency is not in the range of L4 01 L4 02 nor the range of frequency reference L4 02 Figure 11 62 User Defined Speed Agree 1 Time Chart 4 Frequency Detection 1 Setting Value Function Description ...

Page 714: ...motor rotation directions The drive uses the L4 01 value as the forward reverse detection level The drive outputs the motor speed status when A1 02 3 Control Method Selection CLV It also outputs the motor speed status when A1 02 4 and n4 72 1 Speed Feedback Mode With Encoder ON The output frequency is more than L4 01 OFF The output frequency is less than L4 01 L4 02 or it is not more than L4 01 Fi...

Page 715: ...urce A Run Command from Keypad Setting Value Function Description A Run Command Source Shows the selected Run command source ON The keypad is the Run command source OFF b1 02 or b1 16 Run Command Selection 1 or 2 is the Run command source B Torque Detection 1 N O Setting Value Function Description B Torque Detection 1 N O The terminal activates when the drive detects overtorque ON The output curre...

Page 716: ...scription 13 Speed Agree 2 The terminal activates when the output frequency is in the range of the frequency reference L4 04 Speed Agree Detection Width Note When using Closed Loop Vector Control the motor speed is used as the reference ON The output frequency is within the range of frequency reference L4 04 OFF The output frequency is not within the range of frequency reference L4 04 14 User Set ...

Page 717: ...s not exceed the value of L4 03 L4 04 OFF The output frequency exceeds the value of L4 03 L4 04 16 Frequency Detection 4 Setting Value Function Description 16 Frequency Detection 4 The terminal activates when the output frequency L4 03 Speed Agree Detection Level After the terminal activates the terminal stays activated until the output frequency L4 03 L4 04 Note The detection level set in L4 03 i...

Page 718: ...n 2 N C The terminal deactivates when the drive detects overtorque OFF The output current torque exceeds the torque value set with S6 05 Overtorque Detection Level 2 and remained in this state longer than the time set with S6 06 Overtorque Detection Time 2 Note Refer to Overtorque Detection on page 214 for details 1A During Reverse Setting Value Function Description 1A During Reverse The terminal ...

Page 719: ...at Pre Alarm oH The terminal activates when the drive heatsink temperature is at the level set with L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level Note Refer to L8 02 Overheat Alarm Level for more information 21 Brake Release Command Setting Value Function Description 21 Brake Release Command Set the sequence external to the drive to release the brake when the terminal turns ON and holds the brake when the terminal t...

Page 720: ...ion 33 Zero Servo Complete Setting Value Function Description 33 Zero Servo Complete The terminal activates when positioning in the range set with b9 02 Zero Servo Completion Window completes after sending the Zero Servo command Note Refer to b9 Zero Servo for more information 37 During Frequency Output Setting Value Function Description 37 During Frequency Output The terminal activates when the d...

Page 721: ...lection for more information about drive derating operation 4E Braking Transistor Fault rr Setting Value Function Description 4E Braking Transistor Fault rr The terminal activates when the internal braking transistor overheats and the drive detects an rr Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault fault 4F Braking Resistor Overheat rH Setting Value Function Description 4F Braking Resistor Overheat rH The ter...

Page 722: ...s Register 2 Bit Select for the MEMOBUS register address set with H2 09 Modbus Register 2 Address Select activates 66 Comparator1 Setting Value Function Description 66 Comparator1 The terminal activates if the monitor value set with H2 20 Comparator 1 Monitor Selection is in range of the values of H2 21 Comparator 1 Lower Limit and H2 22 Comparator 1 Upper Limit for the time set in H2 24 Comparato...

Page 723: ...ing at Start Setting Value Function Description B1 DC Injection Braking at Start The terminal activates when the motor is started and during DC Injection Braking B2 DC Injection Braking at Stop Setting Value Function Description B2 DC Injection Braking at Stop The terminal activates when the motor is stopped and during DC Injection Braking B3 Motor 3 Selection Setting Value Function Description B3...

Page 724: ...se Torque Limit 12 Regenerative Torque Limit 14 Torque Compensation 15 General Torque Limit 1F Not Used Note All analog input scaling uses gain and bias for adjustment Set the gain and bias values correctly Example Analog Input Settings The function set for terminal A1 is set with Frequency Reference H3 02 0 the gain is 200 H3 03 200 0 and the bias is 0 H3 04 0 0 When you input a 10 V signal the f...

Page 725: ...s Reg 15C3h Input Function 32767 to 32767 H3 42 1 Set as 100 4096 Figure 11 73 Functional Block Diagram for MEMOBUS Multi Function AI Command 1 Note Refer to H3 xx MFAI Function Selections for the analog input setting values Set H3 40 to H3 42 F when not using the terminal The through mode function is not supported The following MFAI terminals cannot be selected with H3 40 to H3 42 H3 xx Setting V...

Page 726: ... to MFAI terminal A1 0 0 999 9 999 9 This parameter sets the bias for the function set for terminal A1 as a percentage when 0 V is input Use H3 03 Terminal A1 Gain Setting and H3 04 to adjust the characteristics of the analog input signal to terminal A1 H3 05 Terminal A3 Signal Level Select No Hex Name Description Default Range H3 05 0413 Terminal A3 Signal Level Select Sets the input signal level...

Page 727: ...gnal level for MFAI terminal A2 2 0 3 0 0 to 10 V Lower Limit at 0 Inputs the voltage signal of 0 V to 10 V The signal is reset to 0 when it becomes a negative number due to gain and bias adjustment 1 10 to 10V Bipolar Reference Inputs the voltage signal of 10 V to 10 V This setting enables positive and negative polarity signals When this setting is used as the frequency reference the motor runs r...

Page 728: ...ge H3 13 041B Analog Input FilterTime Constant Sets the time constant for primary delay filters on MFAI terminals 0 03 s 0 00 2 00 s Apply the primary delay filter to the analog input to enable an analog input signal without the use of high frequency noise components An analog input filter prevents irregular drive control Drive operation becomes more stable as the programmed time becomes longer bu...

Page 729: ...he offset when a signal of 0 V is input H3 40 Mbus Reg 15C1h Input Function No Hex Name Description Default Range H3 40 0B5C Mbus Reg 15C1h Input Function Sets the MEMOBUS AI1 function F 4 2F You can use the MFAI function from MEMOBUS Modbus communications Use this parameter to set the function Sets the function for MEMOBUS Modbus register 15C1h Refer to Multi Function Analog Input Terminal Settin...

Page 730: ...on Description 1 Frequency Gain The drive multiplies the analog frequency reference with the input value from the MFAI set with this function Example When you set frequency gain for terminal A2 H3 10 1 Terminal A2 Function Selection Frequency Gain A 50 frequency gain is input to terminal A2 A frequency reference of 80 is input from terminal A1 The calculated frequency reference is 40 of the maximu...

Page 731: ...nd C1 09 Fast Stop Time when the full scale analog signal 10 Vor 20 mA is 100 When you enable C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 the acceleration time is Acceleration Time 1 Setting value of C1 01 acceleration and deceleration time gain 100 Figure 11 75 Acceleration Deceleration Time Gain through Analog Input 6 DC Injection Braking Current Setting Value Function Description 6 DC Injection Braking Current E...

Page 732: ...lue Function Description D Frequency Bias Enters the bias value added to the frequency reference as a percentage of the maximum output frequency The drive adds the input value from the MFAI terminal set with this function to the frequency reference as the bias value Note When you select d1 01 to d1 16 or d1 17 Reference 1 to 16 or JOG Frequency Reference as the frequency reference it will disable ...

Page 733: ...t the four torque limit quadrants Set H3 02 H3 06 or H3 10 MFAI Function Select to 10 11 or 12 Forward Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit Use MFAI to set all four torque limit quadrants together Set H3 02 H3 06 or H3 10 to 15 General Torque Limit The figure shows the configuration method for each quadrant Figure 11 78 Torque Limits and Analog Input Setting Parameters Note When you use L7 01 to L7 0...

Page 734: ...nters the torque compensation value if the motor rated torque is 100 15 General Torque Limit Setting Value Function Description 15 General Torque Limit Enters the torque limit that is the same for all quadrants for forward reverse and regenerative operation if the motor rated torque is 100 1F Not Used Setting Value Function Description 1F Not Used Use this setting for unused terminals or to use te...

Page 735: ...he gain and bias Figure 11 80 Analog Output Gain Bias Setting Example 1 For example when the parameter value set to analog output is 0 and a 3 V signal is output to terminal FM H3 04 Terminal FM Analog Output Bias is set to 30 Figure 11 81 Analog Output Gain Bias Setting Example 2 Calibrate Terminal FM The output signal is adjustable while the drive is stopped Use the following procedure to perfor...

Page 736: ...Range H4 02 041E RUN Terminal FM Analog Output Gain Sets the gain of the Ux xx monitor signal set in H4 01 terminals FM Monitor Selection 100 0 999 9 999 9 The analog signal output from the terminal FM is a maximum of 10 V Select the signal level with H4 07 Terminal FM Signal Level Select H4 03 Terminal FM Analog Output Bias No Hex Name Description Default Range H4 03 041F RUN Terminal FM Analog O...

Page 737: ...t H4 07 Terminal FM Signal Level Select No Hex Name Description Default Range H4 07 0423 Terminal FM Signal Level Select Sets the MFAO terminal FM output signal level 0 0 1 0 0 to 10 Vdc 1 10 to 10 Vdc H4 08 Terminal AM Signal Level Select No Hex Name Description Default Range H4 08 0424 Terminal AM Signal Level Select Sets the MFAO terminal AM output signal level 0 0 1 0 0 to 10 Vdc 1 10 to 10 Vd...

Page 738: ...tion Default Range H5 03 0427 Communication Parity Selection Sets the communications parity used for MEMOBUS Modbus communications 0 0 2 Note Re energize the drive or set H5 20 1 Communication Parameters Reload Reload Now after you change the parameter setting 0 No parity 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity H5 04 Communication Error Stop Method No Hex Name Description Default Range H5 04 0428 Communication...

Page 739: ...re 11 82 Drive Transmit Wait Time H5 09 CE Detection Time No Hex Name Description Default Range H5 09 0435 CE Detection Time Sets the detection time for CE Modbus Communication Error issues when communication stops 2 0 s 0 0 10 0 s H5 10 Modbus Register 0025H Unit Sel No Hex Name Description Default Range H5 10 0436 Modbus Register 0025H Unit Sel Sets the unit of measure used for the MEMOBUS Modbu...

Page 740: ...nication Parameters Reload No Hex Name Description Default Range H5 20 0B57 Communication Parameters Reload Sets the function to immediately enable updated MEMOBUS Modbus communications parameters 0 0 1 0 Reload at Next Power Cycle 1 Reload Now Note The setting value automatically returns to H5 20 0 after you enable MEMOBUS Modbus communications parameter changes The setting values of these parame...

Page 741: ...n than wired input and output functions Incorrect function settings can cause serious injury or death Figure 11 83 Virtual Analog I O Functional Block Diagram Figure 11 84 Virtual Digital I O Functional Block Diagram Note Refer to H1 xx MFDI Setting Values for more information on the virtual digital input setting values Refer to H2 xx MFDO Setting Values for more information on the virtual digital...

Page 742: ...Virtual Multi Function Input 4 Sets the function that enters the virtual input set in H7 16 Virtual Multi Function Output 4 F 0 1FF H7 10 Virtual Multi Function Output 1 No Hex Name Description Default Range H7 10 11A4 Expert Virtual Multi Function Output 1 Sets the function for virtual digital output 1 F 0 1FF H7 11 Virtual Output 1 Delay Time No Hex Name Description Default Range H7 11 11A5 Expe...

Page 743: ...ts the minimum ON time for virtual digital output 4 0 1 s 0 0 25 0 s H7 30 Virtual Analog Input Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range H7 30 1177 Expert Virtual Analog Input Selection Sets the virtual analog input function F 0 FF H7 31 Virtual Analog Input Gain No Hex Name Description Default Range H7 31 1178 RUN Expert Virtual Analog Input Gain Sets the virtual analog input gain 100 0 99...

Page 744: ...tion Sets the monitor to be output from the virtual analog output 102 0 999 Set the x xx part of the Ux xx Monitor For example set H7 41 102 to monitor U1 02 Output Frequency H7 42 Virtual Analog Output FilterTime No Hex Name Description Default Range H7 42 1165 Virtual Analog Output FilterTime Sets the time constant for a primary filter of the virtual analog output 0 00 s 0 00 2 00 s V f CL V f O...

Page 745: ...istics in motor 1 phase as shown in the following graph Figure 11 85 PTC Thermistor Temperature and Resistance When the PTC input signal input to the drive is more than the overload alarm level the drive detects oH3 Motor Overheat PTC Input The drive continues the operation set in L1 03 Motor Thermistor oH Alarm Select The overheat fault level triggers an oH4 Motor Overheat Fault PTC Input fault a...

Page 746: ... H2 02 1F Term M3 M4 Function Selection Motor Overload Alarm oL1 to enable this function If the motor overload level is more than 90 of the oL1 detection level the output terminal activates and triggers an overload alarm Note When you connect only one motor to a drive set L1 01 1 to 3 or 6 Enabled External thermal relays are not necessary in these conditions 0 Disable Disable motor protection when...

Page 747: ...ase frequency The motor operates continuously at 10 to 100 base frequency 3 Constant Torque 100 1 SpeedRange Use this setting for vector motors with a speed range for constant torque of 1 100 The speed control for this motor is 1 to 100 when at 100 load Operating slower than 1 speed at 100 load will cause motor overload Load Tolerance Cooling Capability Overload Characteristics at 100 motor load T...

Page 748: ...100 load hot start the default setting triggers the electronic thermal protector Figure 11 88 shows an example of the electronic thermal protector operation time Motor overload protection operates in the range between a cold start and a hot start This example shows a general purpose motor operating at the base frequency with L1 02 set to 1 0 min Cold start Shows the motor protection operation time...

Page 749: ...t relay output terminal MA MC turns ON and MB MC turns OFF L1 05 Motor Thermistor Filter Time No Hex Name Description Default Range L1 05 0484 Motor Thermistor Filter Time Sets the primary delay time constant for the PTC input signal entered to the drive This parameter prevents accidental motor overheat faults 0 20 s 0 00 10 00 s L1 08 oL1 Current Level No Hex Name Description Default Range L1 08 ...

Page 750: ...e Description Default Range L2 05 0489 Undervoltage Detection Lvl Uv1 Sets the voltage at which a Uv1 DC Bus Undervoltage fault is triggered Usually it is not necessary to change this setting Determined by E1 01 Determined by E1 01 NOTICE Damage to Equipment When you set this parameter to a value lower than the default you must install an AC reactor on the input side of the power supply If you do ...

Page 751: ...vention During Acceleration function Operation is different for different control methods V f Control or OLV Control When the output current is more than the value set in L3 02 Stall Prevent Level during Accel the drive stops acceleration When the output current is less than the value set in L3 02 15 the drive starts to accelerate again The Stall Prevention function level automatically falls for c...

Page 752: ... constant output range as a percentage of the drive rated output current 50 0 100 The stall prevention level set in L3 02 Stall Prevent Level during Accel is automatically reduced when the motor is running within the constant output range Parameter L3 03 is the limit value used to prevent the stall prevention level during constant output ranges to fall below the minimum required level Note The fun...

Page 753: ...recision of the stop position is very important Consider using a dynamic braking option instead in such applications The DC bus voltage level for Stall Prevention depends on the input voltage setting of E1 01 Input AC Supply Voltage Table 11 34 Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration Drive Input Voltage Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration 200 V class 377 V 400 V class 754 V This figure s...

Page 754: ...f the setting of L3 05 and L3 06 Stall Prevent Level during Run if the output frequency falls below 6 Hz 0 Disabled Drive runs at the set frequency reference A heavy load may cause the motor to stall and trip the drive with an oC Overcurrent or oL1 1 Deceleration Time 1 C1 02 The drive will decelerate for the time set in C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 If the current exceeds the Stall Prevention level s...

Page 755: ...tion Default Range L3 21 0466 Expert OVSuppression Accel Decel P Gain Sets the proportional gain to calculate acceleration and deceleration rates Determined by A1 02 0 10 10 00 This parameter is enabled when L3 04 2 Stall Prevention during Decel Intelligent Ignore Accel Ramp L3 23 Stall P Reduction at Constant HP No Hex Name Description Default Range L3 23 04FD Stall P Reduction at Constant HP Set...

Page 756: ... when L3 04 2 Stall Prevention during Decel Intelligent Ignore Accel Ramp Automatic Adjustment of Parameters Execute Inertia Tuning when A1 02 3 Control Method Selection Closed Loop Vector Parameters are automatically adjusted Manual Parameter Input The load inertia ratio is calculated using the following expression L3 26 Additional DC Bus Capacitors No Hex Name Description Default Range L3 26 045...

Page 757: ...ry to change this setting 10 0 0 0 100 0 Note Set L3 01 3 Stall Prevention during Accel Current Limit Method to enable this function L3 39 Current Limit Filter Time Accel No Hex Name Description Default Range L3 39 11D3 Current Limit Filter Time Accel Sets the time constant to adjust the acceleration rate when L3 01 3 Stall Prevention during Accel Current Limit Method Usually it is not necessary t...

Page 758: ... detection level when H2 01 to H2 05 13 14 15 16 MFDO Function Selection Speed Agree 2 User Set Speed Agree 2 Frequency Detection 3 Frequency Detection 4 L4 04 Speed Agree Detection Width No Hex Name Description Default Range L4 04 049C Speed Agree Detection Width Sets the width to detect speed agree or motor speed Determined by A1 02 Determined by A1 02 Sets the speed detection width or motor spe...

Page 759: ...ed to loads and the generation of regenerative torque below a specific amount This function protects machinery and improves reliability of continuous operation Torque limits can be set individually for the four quadrants which include torque direction motoring regeneration and direction of motor rotation forward reverse When the torque reference value reaches the set torque limit the MFDO terminal...

Page 760: ...tor rated torque is the 100 value 200 0 300 Note Use this method to set the torque limit and enable the lower torque limit Set H3 02 H3 06 or H3 10 10 15 MFAI Function Select Forward Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit Use a communication option to set the torque limits You must think about drive capacity when a large quantity of torque is necessary If you set the value too high the drive can detect...

Page 761: ...tant than the torque limit during speed changes 1 Proportional Integral control The torque limit function always uses integral control Use this setting when a very accurate torque limit is necessary during speed changes for example in winding machine applications If you make the torque limit the most important it can Increase the acceleration and deceleration times Not let the motor speed reach th...

Page 762: ...l rotate at a speed higher than specified when a you input a regenerative load Do not set the value higher than necessary L8 Drive Protection L8 parameters set protective functions that prevent faults such as overheating phase loss and ground faults L8 01 3 ERF DB Resistor Protection No Hex Name Description Default Range L8 01 04AD 3 ERF DB Resistor Protection Sets the function to enable braking r...

Page 763: ...ile the alarm continues to be output If the overheat alarm is still output after the drive decelerated 10 times the output terminal set for oH Pre Alarm Reduction Limit H2 01 to H2 05 4D switches ON When the overheat alarm stops being output during deceleration the drive accelerates until the frequency reference valid prior to this overheat alarm output being turned OFF is reached The following di...

Page 764: ...08 04B4 Output Phase Loss Detection Lvl Sets the output phase loss detection level 5 0 0 0 20 0 L8 09 Output Ground Fault Detection No Hex Name Description Default Range L8 09 04B5 Output Ground Fault Detection Sets the function to enable and disable ground fault protection Determined by o2 04 0 1 0 Disabled The drive will not detect ground faults 1 Enabled If there is high leakage current or a gr...

Page 765: ...can cause heat stress and decrease the life span of drive IGBTs 0 Disabled No Additional Derate The drive does not decrease the overload protection level 1 Enabled Reduced oL2 Level When the drive detects oL2 during low speed operation it automatically decreases the overload detection level At zero speed the drive derates the overload by 50 L8 18 Software Current Limit Selection No Hex Name Descri...

Page 766: ...3 Initialize Parameters The value is preset to the appropriate value when the drive is shipped Change the setting value in the following circumstances only Drives are installed side by side Drive cooling fins heatsinks are installed externally to the control panel The overload protection detection level for the drive is automatically adjusted to the optimal value in accordance with the setting val...

Page 767: ...1 0 15 0 kHz Sets the low carrier frequency when IGBT protection is enabled L8 40 Carrier Freq Reduction Off Delay No Hex Name Description Default Range L8 40 04F1 Carrier Freq Reduction Off Delay Sets the length of time until the automatically reduced carrier frequency returns to the condition before the reduction Determined by A1 02 0 00 2 00 s Set L8 40 0 00 to enable the carrier frequency redu...

Page 768: ...internal braking transistor when using a braking transistor or optional braking resistors The following models have a built in braking transistor 2003 to 2115 4002 to 4150 L9 Drive Protection 2 L9 parameters are used to configure the protection function used to detect cooling fan faults L9 16 FAn1 Detect Time No Hex Name Description Default Range L9 16 11DC Expert FAn1 Detect Time Sets the detecti...

Page 769: ... 00 0 00 2 50 Adjust this parameter in these conditions When n1 01 1 2 Hunting Prevention Selection Enabled Normal Enabled High Carrier Frequency If oscillation occurs when you operate a motor with a light load increase the setting value in 0 1 unit increments When n1 01 1 2 if the motor stalls Decrease the setting value in 0 1 unit increments n1 03 Hunting Prevention Time Constant No Hex Name Des...

Page 770: ... set this parameter to 1 n1 14 DC Bus Stabilization Time No Hex Name Description Default Range n1 14 1B5A Expert DC Bus Stabilization Time Adjusts the responsiveness of the oscillation suppression function for the DC bus voltage Set n1 13 1 DC Bus Stabilization Control Enabled to enable this parameter 100 0 ms 50 0 500 0 ms Note Adjust this parameter in 100 ms increments n1 15 PWM Voltage Offset C...

Page 771: ...cription Default Range n2 01 0584 Automatic Freq Regulator Gain F Sets the gain of the AFR function for forward run as a magnification value Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 1 00 0 00 10 00 Adjust this parameter in these conditions If hunting or oscillation occurs with light loads increase the setting value in 0 05 unit increments and examine the response When torque is not suffi...

Page 772: ...verexcitation deceleration generates significant braking torque through motor overexcitation by increasing excitation current during deceleration The deceleration time can be adjusted for overexcitation deceleration by specifying the deceleration speed Reacceleration of motors can also be performed during deceleration Entering the Run command during overexcitation deceleration cancels overexcitati...

Page 773: ... you use overexcitation deceleration frequently or if you use overexcitation deceleration for an extended period of time it can increase motor temperature Decrease the setting value in these conditions If ov Overvoltage occurs increase the deceleration time n3 14 OEB High Frequency Injection No Hex Name Description Default Range n3 14 0532 Expert OEB High Frequency Injection Sets the function that...

Page 774: ...g Low Speed Comp Gain No Hex Name Description Default Range n4 60 1B80 Motoring Low Speed Comp Gain Sets a compensation gain to improve the control qualities for motoring loads in the low speed range 100 0 50 0 200 0 Note To improve torque accuracy in the motoring direction when running at low speeds either perform only Stationary Auto Tuning for Line to Line Resistance or increase the setting val...

Page 775: ...t rotational Auto Tuning n4 65 Flux Estimate Response High Freq No Hex Name Description Default Range n4 65 1B85 Flux Estimate Response High Freq In high speed ranges where the output frequency is n4 67 SwitchingFreq forEstimation gain this adjusts the responsiveness of the magnetic flux estimation Usually it is not necessary to change this setting 1 00 0 50 3 00 If under no load conditions oS Ove...

Page 776: ... improves control stability when writing at low speeds Increase the setting in 0 3 Hz increments at the time of low speed references with no load Note Although the stability of speed references for low speeds is improved when n4 70 is increased it can sometimes negatively impact speed control accuracy n4 71 Flux Estimation Method No Hex Name Description Default Range n4 71 1B8B Expert Flux Estimat...

Page 777: ...se the setting value in 20 increments when the torque is insufficient due to loads of at least 100 Note that if the setting is too high overexcitation could occur causing the motor generate heat n5 Feed Forward Control Feed forward control improves responsiveness of acceleration and deceleration in accordance with the speed reference Increasing the values set in C5 01 and C5 03 ASR Proportional Ga...

Page 778: ...rward Control Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range n5 01 05B0 Feed Forward Control Selection Sets the feed forward function 0 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled n5 02 Motor Inertia Acceleration Time No Hex Name Description Default Range n5 02 05B1 Motor Inertia Acceleration Time Sets the length of time for the motor to accelerate from the stopped to the maximum frequency with a single motor at th...

Page 779: ... this procedure to set n5 03 Set n5 02 Motor Inertia Acceleration Time 1 Connect the motor and load 2 Set C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 0 3 Use L7 01 to L7 04 Torque Limit to set the expected test run torque limit levels 4 Set the frequency reference as specified by the high speed range of the machine 5 Measure the length of time for the motor to reach the command reference speed Show U1 05 Motor Spee...

Page 780: ...tion improves overload tolerance within the low speed range 2 Voltage Correction Tuning The drive adjusts the output voltage during run This function improves overload tolerance and suppresses issues of speed precision losses because of increasing motor temperatures n6 05 Online Tuning Gain No Hex Name Description Default Range n6 05 05C7 Expert Online Tuning Gain Sets the compensation gain when n...

Page 781: ...s to Backup Restore o3 06 Auto Parameter Backup Selection o3 07 Auto Parameter Backup Interval o4 22 Time Format o4 23 Date Format o4 24 bAT Detection Selection o5 01 Log Start Stop Selection o5 02 Log Sampling Interval o5 03 to o5 12 Log Monitor Data 1 to 10 o1 Keypad Display Selection o1 parameters select the parameters shown on the initial keypad screen and to configure the parameter setting un...

Page 782: ...annot select U2 monitor Fault Trace and U3 Monitor Fault History The selectable monitors vary depending on the control method o1 02 Monitor Selection at Power up No Hex Name Description Default Range o1 02 0501 RUN Monitor Selection at Power up Sets the monitor item that the keypad screen shows after you energize the drive Refer to U Monitors for information about the monitor items that the keypad...

Page 783: ...he hoisting speed is calculated with the following expression Hoisting speed m min Frequency Hz 60 2 pole 1 Roping ratio 1 Gear ratio Drum diameter π Note Set the following parameters to populate the variables in the expression o1 20 Sheave Diameter o1 21 Roping Ratio o1 22 Gear Ratio o1 04 V f Pattern Display Unit No Hex Name Description Default Range o1 04 0503 V f Pattern Display Unit Sets the ...

Page 784: ...laces XXXX X 2 Two Decimal Places XXX XX 3 Three Decimal Places XX XXX Note Set o1 03 3 Frequency Display Unit Selection User Units o1 10 o1 11 before you set o1 10 User Units Maximum Value and o1 11 o1 20 Sheave Diameter No Hex Name Description Default Range o1 20 0575 Sheave Diameter Sets the sheave diameter 400 mm 100 2000 mm o1 21 Roping Ratio No Hex Name Description Default Range o1 21 0576 R...

Page 785: ...the intensity of the backlight decreases o1 37 LCD Backlight ON OFF Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range o1 37 11BA RUN LCD Backlight ON OFF Selection Sets the automatic shut off function for the LCD backlight 1 0 1 Note Use o1 36 LCD Backlight Brightness to adjust the intensity of the LCD backlight 0 OFF The backlight will automatically turn off after the time set in o1 38 LCD Backligh...

Page 786: ...0 11BD RUN Home Screen Display Selection Sets the monitor display mode for the Home screen This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad 0 0 3 0 Custom Monitor 1 Bar Graph 2 Analog Gauge 3 Trend Plot o1 41 1st Monitor Area Selection No Hex Name Description Default Range o1 41 11C1 RUN 1st Monitor Area Selection Sets the horizontal axis value used to display the monitor set in o1 24 Custom Mo...

Page 787: ...ected with o1 24 This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad 100 0 300 0 99 9 o1 48 Trend Plot 1 Scale Maximum Value No Hex Name Description Default Range o1 48 11C8 RUN Trend Plot 1 Scale Maximum Value Sets the maximum value for the vertical axis used to display the monitor that was set in o1 24 Custom Monitor 1 as a trend plot This parameter is only available with an LCD keypad 100 0 299...

Page 788: ...Selection Sets the function to use on the keypad to stop the drive when the Run command source for the drive is REMOTE external and not assigned to the keypad 1 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled stays enabled when the Run command source has not been assigned to the keypad To start the drive again after you push to stop operation turn the external Run command OFF and ON again o2 03 User Parameter Default Va...

Page 789: ...e the keypad to change the frequency reference value 1 Immediate MOP style The frequency reference changes when you enter it with the keypad This then changes the output frequency It is not necessary to push The drive keeps the frequency reference for 5 seconds after you use and on the keypad to change the frequency reference value o2 06 Keypad Disconnect Detection No Hex Name Description Default ...

Page 790: ...pad LED lamps 0 0 2 0 Enable Status Ring Keypad LED 1 LED Status Ring Disable 2 Keypad LED Light Disable o2 26 Alarm Display at Ext 24V Power No Hex Name Description Default Range o2 26 1563 Alarm Display at Ext 24V Power When you connect a backup external 24 V power supply this parameter sets the function to trigger an alarm when the main circuit power supply voltage decreases 0 0 1 0 Disabled Th...

Page 791: ...ackup on the keypad menu screen to do the backup function the drive automatically sets o3 02 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled o3 04 Select Backup Restore Location No Hex Name Description Default Range o3 04 0B3E Select Backup Restore Location Sets the storage location for drive parameters when you back up and restore parameters This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad 0 0 3 You can use the ...

Page 792: ...ive can write data to the keypad a maximum of 100 000 times If you write data to the keypad more than 100 000 times you must replace the keypad 0 Every 10 minutes 1 Every 30 minutes 2 Every 60 minutes 3 Every 12 hours o4 Maintenance Mon Settings o4 parameters set the expected service life to help you know when to replace parts The drive will show an alarm to tell you when the replacement part inte...

Page 793: ...ents o4 07 Softcharge Relay Maintenance Set No Hex Name Description Default Range o4 07 0523 Softcharge Relay Maintenance Set Sets the U4 06 PreChargeRelayMainte monitor value 0 0 150 When you replace a drive set o4 07 0 to reset U4 06 When the o4 07 setting changes the count of U4 06 starts again as specified by the setting of o4 07 After you complete the configuration o4 07 automatically resets ...

Page 794: ...4 24 Number of Runs Low and U4 25 Number of Runs High 0 0 1 0 No Reset Keeps the monitor values for U4 02 U4 24 and U4 25 1 Reset Resets the values of U4 02 U4 24 and U4 25 After the reset the drive automatically resets o4 13 to 0 o4 22 Time Format No Hex Name Description Default Range o4 22 154F RUN Time Format Sets the time display format This parameter is only available when using an LCD keypad...

Page 795: ...Default Data Log Monitors o5 03 Log Monitor Data 1 101 U1 01 Frequency Reference o5 04 Log Monitor Data 2 102 U1 02 Output Frequency o5 05 Log Monitor Data 3 103 U1 03 Output Current o5 06 Log Monitor Data 4 107 U1 07 DC Bus Voltage o5 07 Log Monitor Data 5 108 U1 08 Output Power o5 08 Log Monitor Data 6 000 Not selected o5 09 Log Monitor Data 7 000 Not selected o5 10 Log Monitor Data 8 000 Not se...

Page 796: ...A Selection 8 Sampling time 5 max 1000 Setting value Dec of o5 02 Log Sampling Interval Unit ms 9 Row number 6 000001 Row number Hex in the data log file 1 If the time is not set in the keypad the text string of 000000000000 is generated to represent the time Second Row Log Data Information The following example illustrates the data text strings and data generated for the second row of log data Ex...

Page 797: ...og Monitor Data 1 4 Log monitor data Hex of the monitor selected with o5 03 Log Monitor Data 1 5 Log Monitor Data 2 4 Log monitor data Hex of the monitor selected with o5 04 Log Monitor Data 2 13 Log Monitor Data 10 4 Log monitor data Hex of the monitor selected with o5 12 Log Monitor Data 10 14 Reserved 4 15 Encoding data 4 Encoding data for log monitor data 1 through 10 Hex Bits 0 through 9 repr...

Page 798: ...g an LCD keypad 103 000 101 999 Note Sets the number of the U monitor you will log For example to show U1 03 Output Current set o5 05 103 When it is not necessary to set data log monitors set this parameter to 000 You cannot select U2 monitor Fault Trace or U3 Monitor Fault History o5 06 Log Monitor Data 4 No Hex Name Description Default Range o5 06 1556 RUN Log Monitor Data 4 Sets the data log mo...

Page 799: ...ts the number of the U monitor you will log For example to show U1 01 Frequency Reference set o5 10 101 When it is not necessary to set data log monitors set this parameter to 000 You cannot select U2 monitor Fault Trace or U3 Monitor Fault History o5 11 Log Monitor Data 9 No Hex Name Description Default Range o5 11 155B RUN Log Monitor Data 9 Sets the data log monitor This parameter is only avail...

Page 800: ...quency and E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency after Auto Tuning completes If the maximum output frequency is too low and causes problems change the setting of E1 04 after Auto Tuning completes The following induction motor parameters are set automatically E1 xx V f Pattern for Motor 1 E2 xx Motor Parameters E3 xx V f Pattern for Motor 2 E4 xx Motor 2 Parameters F1 xx Encoder Options only with Closed L...

Page 801: ...crepancies Enter the voltage needed to operate the motor under no load conditions at rated speed to T1 03 for better control precision around rated speed If the motor test report or the motor nameplate is not available enter approximately 90 of the motor rated voltage If the drive input power supply voltage is low enter approximately 90 of the input voltage Current will increase if the input power...

Page 802: ...no load current that is automatically calculated from the values set in T1 02 Motor Rated Power and T1 04 Motor Rated Current Set the no load current shown on the motor test report If the motor test report is not available do not change this parameter T1 10 Motor Rated Slip Frequency No Hex Name Description Default Range T1 10 070A Motor Rated Slip Frequency Sets motor rated slip 0 000 20 000 Hz S...

Page 803: ...p Auto Tuning method 0 0 1 0 Inertia Tuning 1 ASR Speed Regulator T3 01 Test Signal Frequency No Hex Name Description Default Range T3 01 0760 Test Signal Frequency Usually it is not necessary to change this setting Sets the frequency of the test signal applied to the motor during Inertia Tuning 3 0 Hz 0 1 20 0 Hz Lower the setting value if the load inertia is too significant and a fault is detect...

Page 804: ...y No Hex Name Description Default Range T3 04 0763 System Response Frequency This parameter uses the load inertia value from the Inertia Tuning process to automatically calculate and set C5 01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 10 0 Hz 0 1 50 0 Hz Oscillation may result if the value input here is too high V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV ...

Page 805: ...cautions 190 Precautions to Note before ASR Tuning 192 Precautions to Note before Inertia Tuning 192 Rotational Auto Tuning Precautions 191 Stationary Auto Tuning for Line to Line Resistance precautions 192 Stationary Auto Tuning Precautions 191 Stator resistance Auto Tuning precautions 192 Auto Tuning Error 336 377 B Backlight Timing of shut off 177 Backup Parameters drive to keypad 161 Backup fu...

Page 806: ...inless 766 Side by side 766 dEv Detection level 654 Detection time 654 Fault 344 Minor Fault 365 Operation Selection after Detection 652 dFPS 381 DI A3 Parameter 658 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults 382 Digital input option Parameter 658 Digital output option Parameter 664 DIP switch 110 Disposal Battery 425 Drive 425 microSD card 425 Packing material 425 DO A3 Parameter 664 Down 2 command Paramete...

Page 807: ...lt 367 Fan Operation Time Setting 793 FAn1 346 Fast Stop Time Parameter 603 Fault 336 342 Fault code MEMOBUS Modbus 329 Fault Code List 337 Fault history Display procedure 168 Fault Reset 382 Feed Forward Control Parameter 777 Field Forcing Parameter 631 Finless Derating 766 Firmware update lock 582 Freq Ref Setting Method Select 789 Freq reference bias Parameter 631 Frequency Agreement Parameter ...

Page 808: ...E indicator 139 141 LoG 368 LT 1 368 LT 2 368 LT 3 368 LT 4 368 M Main circuit terminals Configuration of terminal block 74 Line voltage drop 80 Wire gauge 80 Wiring 74 Wiring procedure for terminal block 94 Main menu Display procedure 147 Maintenance Period 792 Maximum Output Frequency Motor 2 Parameters 644 Parameter 639 Maximum Output Voltage Motor 2 Parameters 644 Parameter 639 MCCB 125 MEMOBU...

Page 809: ...uring Detection of Faults PTC Input 292 749 Motor Overload Electric Thermal Protection Operation Time 291 748 Protection Functions 289 746 Motor parameters 641 Motor 2 646 Motor 2 Iron Loss 648 Motor 2 Iron Core Saturation Coefficient 1 648 Motor 2 Iron Core Saturation Coefficient 2 648 Motor 2 Leakage Inductance 648 Motor 2 Line to Line Resistance 647 Motor 2 No load Current 647 Motor 2 number of...

Page 810: ...on Select at Overspeed 652 Output Phase Loss Detection Protection Functions 764 ov Fault 358 Minor Fault 370 Overexcitation deceleration Parameter 772 P Panel cut out dimensions 67 Parameter Access Level Selection 569 Automatic selection 583 Backup drive to keypad 161 Changing setting values 158 Checking modified parameters 165 Checking user custom parameters 160 Erase Backed up Parameters 164 Res...

Page 811: ...ication terminals MEMOBUS Modbus Communications 106 Set date and time Operation 171 Set time Operation 171 Side by side Derating 766 Simple Positioning Stop 631 Slip compensation Parameter 605 Softcharge Relay Maintenance Set 793 Software Current Limit Selection Protective function 765 Software version Display procedure 178 Speed Agreement Parameter 757 Speed Detection Parameter 757 Stall Preventi...

Page 812: ...lt Value 788 User Set Display Units Max Value 784 User SetDisplayUnits Dec Display 784 Uv 372 Uv1 361 Detection level settings 750 Uv2 362 Uv3 362 V vAEr 381 V f Pattern 633 Second Motor 644 V f Pattern Display Unit 783 Verify Parameters keypad and drive 163 vFyE 381 Vibration resistant 33 W Wire gauge Control circuit terminals 107 Main circuit terminals 80 Voltage drop 80 Wiring 125 AC reactor 12...

Page 813: ...YASKAWA SIEPC71061723A YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Technical Manual 813 Revision History Date of Publication Revision Number Section Revised Content July 2021 First Edition ...

Page 814: ...4 8511 Japan Phone 81 930 25 2548 www yaskawa co jp In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture thereof the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations Therefore be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documen...

Page 815: ...ual Wire Length Detection Cargo Swing Suppression Software Version PRG 010XX Table of Contents 1 REVISION HISTORY 2 2 BASIC SPECIFICATIONS 3 3 FUNCTION DETAILS 4 4 PARAMETER LIST 15 3 1 WIRE LENGTH DETECTION 4 3 2 CARGO SWING SUPPRESSION ANTI SWING CONTROL 7 ...

Page 816: ...3534 1 2 21 1 Revision History Revision Number Revised Content Date of Publication First Edition 2017 08 1 Changed range value of S9 19 Upper limit 50m to 300m and added notes related to this change 2019 05 ...

Page 817: ...ormance of the crane software will be adversely affected and it will not be possible to obtain sufficient performance from the machine If the direction of motor rotation does not match the machine swap two phases of the power lines to the motor and change F1 05 Encoder 1 Rotation Selection if the motor has an encoder to set the hoisting direction of the machine to the Forward Run command and the l...

Page 818: ...ion at the hoisting limit position is 0 V but the lowering limit position can also be changed to 0 V with S9 05 AO 0V Reference Hook Position If the wire length has a certain amount of length at the hoisting limit position adjust that with the analog monitor gain and bias When S9 02 0 Hook Position Reset Power down is selected oPL Origin Position Loss Detected will be output each time the power su...

Page 819: ...s Hoist the hook to the hoisting limit position and then input Forward Travel Limit or set S9 03 to 1 Lower the hook to the lowering limit position and then input Reverse Travel Limit When using S9 07 Home Position Number of Rotation move the hook to the home position and then input Home Position Set oPL Origin Position Loss Detected will be output until the origin position is detected 1 Hook Posi...

Page 820: ... an analog output AO The analog signal is 0 V at the selected reference position No Name Setting Range Default Setting S9 05 AO 0V Reference Hook Position 0 1 0 0 Forward Limit Position Forward travel limit activation position 0 V reverse travel limit activation position 10 V 1 Lower Limit Position Reverse travel limit activation position 0 V forward travel limit activation position 10 V S9 06 Mot...

Page 821: ...間 荷 トロリ 加減速により生じる荷振れ a Function Disabled S9 11 0 設定加速時間 周波数 時間 トロリ 荷 U1 16 ソフトスタート後の出力周波数 設定減速時間 運転指令 振れ止め 制御中 振れ角 時間 荷振れを抑制 b Function Enabled S9 11 1 Figure 3 3 Cargo Swing Suppression Anti Swing Control Note The effect of Cargo Swing Suppression when the traverse shaft or traveling shaft stops is dependent on the mechanical configuration of the crane Be aware that cargo swinging caused by the l...

Page 822: ...ng operation or the condition of the suspended cargo wire length correction can be enabled and disabled using multi function digital inputs Figure 3 4 Example of Connections When There is Little Change in the Center of Gravity Position When There are Large Changes in the Length of the Wire up to the Center of Gravity Position of the Wire Tip When there are large changes in the length of the wire f...

Page 823: ...i function digital inputs Wire Length Correction 1 Wire Length Correction 2 Wire Length Correction 3 Fast Stop Wire Length Correction 1 Wire Length Correction 2 Wire Length Correction 3 Fast Stop External Inputs according to lifting lowering Analog connection MEMOBUS communications External Inputs Analog input MEMOBUS input wire length External Inputs Analog input MEMOBUS input wire length ...

Page 824: ...ures if you need to increase the effect of Cargo Swing Suppression Lower the frequency level that turns ON the Brake Release command Set S1 54 0 Disable Brake Sequence and assign during bb Baseblock to the Brake command Motor Switch Motors 2 and 3 do not support Anti Swing Control Anti Swing Control is applied to motor 1 Descriptions of Parameters S9 11 Anti Swing Control Selection Enables and dis...

Page 825: ...ondition of the suspended cargo correct for this using S9 28 to S9 30 Correction value1 to 3 of Wire Length a When There is Little Change in the Center of Gravity Position of the Wire Tip from the Center of the Lifting and Lowering Shaft Drum A B b When There is a Large Change in the Center of Gravity Position of the Wire Tip from the Center of the Lifting and Lowering Shaft Drum C D Figure 3 6 Wi...

Page 826: ...ded If the center of gravity position of the wire tip changes due to the condition of the suspended cargo correct for this using S9 28 to S9 30 Correction value1 to 3 of Wire Length S9 14 2 Sets the wire length when the MEMOBUS input is 100 Sets the wire length in meters from the center of the lifting and lowering shaft drum to the center of gravity position of the wire tip when the wire is lowere...

Page 827: ... cable Motor cable Encoder cable Length calculated using external input value Wire Length Rolling Up Wire Length Change in center of gravity position of wire tip due to suspended cargo Corrected by S9 28 to 30 Correction value1 to 3 of Wire Length At hoisting Limit At forward travel limit activation At lowering limit At reverse travel limit activation ...

Page 828: ... 50 0 m 0 0 m S9 30 Correction value3 of Wire Length Sets the wire length correction value in meters for the center of gravity position of the wire tip To enable the correction value set Wire Length Correction 3 53 or 153 to a multi function digital input H1 and then enable and disable the correction value with external input ワイヤ長補正1 ワイヤ長補正2 ワイヤ長補正3 U9 06 ワイヤ長 時間 S9 19もしくは外部 入力に応じた長さ S9 28 S9 29 S...

Page 829: ... 0 1 6 S9 06 1A91 Expert Motion Range Over Detect Select V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 0 1 6 S9 07 1A92 Expert Home Position Number of Rotation V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV Sets the number of motor rotations from the hoisting limit position to the home position an arbitrary position when Home Position Set is input 0 rotations 0 to 20000 rotations 6 S9 11 1A94 Expert Anti Swing Control ...

Page 830: ... out of the values of Correction value1 to 3 of Wire Length 0 0 m 50 0 to 50 0 m 14 S9 29 1AA6 Expert Correction value2 of Wire Length V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV Sets the wire length correction value in meters for the center of gravity position of the wire tip The correction value is the total value of the correction values that are enabled by multi function digital input out of the values of Correct...

Page 831: ...change The Forward Run and Reverse Run commands are both valid when this digital input is open 34 Reverse Travel Limit N C V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV When this multi function digital input is opened during reverse operation the Brake Release command is opened brake is applied and the motor coasts to stop Only the Forward Run command is accepted at this time When this multi function digital input is c...

Page 832: ...When S9 14 1 or 2 Wire Length Detection Method External the wire length calculated from the external input is corrected with the setting value of S9 30 The correction value is the total value of the correction values that are enabled by Wire Length Correction 1 to 3 14 13C Home Position Set Inverse Output V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV Inverse output of setting value 3C 150 Anti Swing Switch Inverse Inpu...

Page 833: ...Up 10 Monitors No Hex Name Description MFAO Signal Level Unit Ref U9 Dedicated Application Monitors U9 01 0820 Expert Hook Position NumR V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV Displays the current position of the hook as the number of motor rotations The number of motor rotations is always the Forward Limit Position forward travel limit 0 revolutions No signal output available 1 rotation 5 U9 02 0821 Expert Hook...

Page 834: ...e Anti Swing Control Anti Swing Control and Light Load Acceleration were set at the same time S9 11 0 and S4 01 0 Check the shaft to which the drive is connected If the shaft is the traverse shaft or traveling shaft disable Light Load Acceleration If the shaft is the lifting and lowering shaft disable Anti Swing Control Anti Swing Control and Wire Length Detection were set at the same time S9 11 0...

Page 835: ...owering limit position and then input Reverse Travel Limit When using S9 07 Home Position Number of Rotation move the hook to the home position 2 and then input Home Position Set oPL Origin Position Loss Detected The origin home position was not detected when Wire Length Output was enabled Detect the origin position with one of the following options Hoist the hook to the hoisting limit position an...

Page 836: ...w 4 3 2 Application Precautions 4 3 3 System Configuration 5 3 4 Block Diagram 6 3 5 Descriptions of Parameters 7 4 Parameter List 26 4 1 F1 PG Option Setup Encoder 26 4 2 H1 Multi Function Digital Input Settings 26 4 3 H2 Multi Function Digital Output Settings 28 4 4 H3 Multi Function Analog Input Settings H3 02 H3 06 H3 10 28 4 5 SA Crane Special Func 28 4 6 U9 Crane Monitors 33 4 7 Troubleshoot...

Page 837: ...EZZ023535 2 35 1 Revision History Revision Revised Content Date First Edition 2017 08 ...

Page 838: ...ce of the crane software will be adversely affected and it will not be possible to obtain sufficient performance from the machine If the direction of motor rotation does not match the machine swap two phases of the power lines to the motor and change F1 05 Encoder 1 Rotation Selection if the motor has an encoder to set the hoisting direction of the machine to the Forward Run command and the loweri...

Page 839: ...simultaneously run and stop the motors Additionally simultaneously stop the motors when stopping the machine such as when a fault or Fast Stop occurs If locking the motors with brakes or other equipment construct a system that simultaneously releases and applies the brakes In a system where the motors are mechanically locked the machine may be damaged if only one motor is locked Set the gear ratio...

Page 840: ... frequency reference is restored to the standard frequency reference and the set acceleration and deceleration times C1 01 and C1 02 are used 3 3 System Configuration The master encoder signal is input to the PG option card attached to the CN5 B port of the slave The slave encoder signal is input to the PG option card attached to the CN5 C port of the slave Figure 3 2 Example of Master and Slave C...

Page 841: ...ct MFDI Position P Gain SA 51 Position I Time SA 52 Pos Filter Time SA 53 Pos PI Limit SA 54 Master pulse count Slave pulse count Encoder 2 Pulse Count PPR F1 31 Encoder 1 Pulse Count PPR F1 01 Digital gear ratio Advance Retard MFDI Position error MFDI delete Communications advance retard count Calculation of position deviation Position Error U9 18 Position error Reset MFDI Position error integrat...

Page 842: ...perating the drive in the control mode RUN The parameter can be changed settings during run Motor 2 Refers to a second motor when the drive is operating two motors Switch between motor 1 and motor 2 using the multi function input terminals Expert The parameter that is available in Expert mode only 1 1 When A1 01 3 Access Level Selection Expert Level Expert mode parameters can be displayed on and s...

Page 843: ...whether or not to perform speed and position synchronization during ramp to stop 1 0 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled b1 04 Reverse Operation Selection Multi Function Digital Input SA 31 1 SA 31 2 Master Forward Master Reverse Master Forward Master Reverse b1 04 0 Forward Run command Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Reverse Run command Reverse Forward Forward Reverse b1 04 1 Forward Run command Forward Stop ...

Page 844: ...to SA 35 the upper four digits of the denominator to SA 34 and the lower four digits of the denominator to SA 36 If the number of gears in the numerator or denominator is set to four or fewer digits use SA 33 numerator and SA 34 denominator The gear ratio can be switched with a multi function digital input SA 37 numerator and SA 38 denominator are used in this case When accuracy is not maintained ...

Page 845: ...s to be switched until the drive reaches Speed Agree refer to SA 57 again SA 38 Ratio 2 Den No Hex Name Description Default Setting Range SA 38 1AC0 RUN Ratio 2 Den Sets the denominator of mechanical gear ratio 2 This gear ratio is enabled when a multi function digital input is set to 55 Ratio 2 Select and that digital input is turned ON 1 0 65535 SA 39 Pos Accum Select No Hex Name Description Def...

Page 846: ...ear ratio adjustment parameter for the slave The digital gear ratio is the total value of the parameter setting value analog input value MOP output value and communication input value 100 is added to the digital gear ratio and that result is multiplied by the mechanical gear ratio 0 00 99 99 99 99 SA 42 MOP Adjust Time No Hex Name Description Default Setting Range SA 42 1AC4 RUN MOP Adjust Time Se...

Page 847: ...1 Digital RatioAdj MOP adjustment value Value adjusted using the MOP Adjust Inc 58 and MOP Adjust Dec 59 as multi function digital inputs Analog input value Adjustment value using the Analog Ratio Adj 29 as multi function analog input Communication input value MEMOBUS communications gear ratio adjustment value register 15DDH Shock due to changing the gear ratio can be reduced by setting the time u...

Page 848: ...amount set to SA 45 when the multi function digital input terminal that has been allocated to Advance Slave or Retard Slave is turned ON Figure 3 6 Slave Direction and Advance Retard Operation SA 45 Adv Ret Amount No Hex Name Description Default Setting Range SA 45 1AC7 RUN Adv Ret Amount Sets the amount of compensation that is used for Advance Retard Compensation of the slave drive The Compensati...

Page 849: ...t value even after the power supply is turned OFF SA 51 Position P Gain No Hex Name Description Default Setting Range SA 51 1ACB RUN Position P Gain Sets proportional gain for the position controller Position P Gain SA 51 is set based on Maximum Output Frequency E1 04 of the drive Note Enabled only when set to Position Synchronization mode Note When the setting of E1 04 is changed position control...

Page 850: ... set to 60 Hz SA 56 is set to 10 and position controller output is 10 SA 55 0 The PI output amount added to the frequency reference is 60 Hz 10 6 Hz regardless of the speed level of the master SA 55 1 When the slave frequency reference 30 Hz is larger than 6 Hz E1 04 60 Hz SA 56 10 When the slave frequency reference is smaller than 6 Hz E1 04 60 Hz SA 56 10 Position controller output after adjustm...

Page 851: ... 15 ms or longer 0 0 4 0 Alignment Disable 1 Manual Align Performs position compensation with Alignment when Align Cmd H1 5F is input Position compensation is not performed until the Alignment command is input 2 Auto Align at Start Input of Align Cmd multi function digital input for the initial Alignment operation at start is not required Alignment operates when Slave Trigger and Master Trigger ar...

Page 852: ...gger signal continues for 15 ms When the slave accelerates to follow the master the maximum Alignment speed of the slave is 95 of maximum output frequency Alignment will not function if the master is already running at a speed of 95 of maximum output frequency or higher When the slave decelerates to follow the master the slave may run in reverse However when reverse run is disabled b1 04 1 for the...

Page 853: ...ate SA 62 Master run input Slave run input Alignment input Master Trigger input Slave Trigger input Master motor speed Slave motor speed Align complete output In Alignment output Master run input Slave run input Alignment input Master Trigger input Slave Trigger input Master motor speed Slave motor speed Align complete output In Alignment output SA 62 SA 62 SA 62 Master run input Slave run input A...

Page 854: ...Description Default Setting Range SA 63 1AD4 Align Offset Sets the offset value of the trigger position Position deviation is compensated by the offset When the Forward Run command is used and the offset is positive the position of the slave is compensated by the offset in the advancing direction If the offset is negative the position of the slave is compensated by the offset in the retarding dire...

Page 855: ...SA 63 multi function digital output terminal H2 xx 55 In Alignment turns ON 100 cnt 0 65535 cnt Figure 3 13 In Alignment Multi Function Digital Output with Offset SA 63 3 00 rev and SA 64 4096 cnt SA 64 SA 64 SA 64 Figure 3 12 In Alignment Multi Function Digital Output without Offset SA 63 0 00 rev and SA 64 4096 cnt Slave run input Master Trigger input Slave Trigger input In Alignment SA 64 SA 64...

Page 856: ...2 Align Trim Rate SA 62 SA 62 Align Trim Rate SA 62 Master run input Slave run input Alignment input Master Trigger input Slave Trigger input Master motor speed Slave motor speed Align complete output In Alignment output Master run input Slave run input Alignment input Master Trigger input Slave Trigger input Master motor speed Slave motor speed Align complete output In Alignment output Figure 3 1...

Page 857: ...inputs For a motor with a 1024 PPR encoder this is equivalent to 65 536 revolutions 0 0 2 0 Disabled 1 Ignore First Trigger Disables the position deviation between the first triggers Use this to prevent the mistaken detection of the two trigger patterns used for Alignment For this setting set SA 67 to a distance between the sensors of 50 to 70 2 Fault Detects AF Alignment Fault and coasts to stop ...

Page 858: ...put Master motor speed Slave motor speed Align complete output Master run input Slave run input Alignment input Master Trigger input Slave Trigger input Master motor speed Slave motor speed Align complete output The drive detects the fault when the distance set by SA 67 has been surpassed once SA 67 Max Align Dist Coast to stop Master run input Slave run input Alignment input Master Trigger input ...

Page 859: ... at high speeds where accuracy decreases Setting this parameter to 0 0 Hz disables the function 0 0 Hz 0 0 400 0 Hz SA 69 Align Trg Window No Hex Name Description Default Setting Range SA 69 1ADA RUN Align Trg Window Sets the judgment condition of U9 23 Window Counts when SA 61 4 U9 23 is incremented when the Alignment error exceeds the setting value of SA 69 during Alignment operation The monitor...

Page 860: ...Count SA 70 3 Align Counts U9 23 SA 69 Align Trg Window Align Trig Count SA 70 3 SA 69 Align Trg Window SA 69 Align Trg Window SA 69 Align Trg Window Align Counts U9 23 SA 69 Align Trg Window SA 69 Align Trg Window SA 69 Align Trg Window SA 69 Align Trg Window 3 2 1 0 Last Trigger SA 71 0 3 2 1 0 Alignment is not performed because U9 23 has not reached SA 70 Figure 3 19 SA 61 4 and Window Alignmen...

Page 861: ...lection 0 A Pulse Detection 1 AB Pulse Detection 0 0 1 F1 31 3B0H Encoder 2 Pulse Count PPR Sets the number of output pulses per revolution of the encoder 600 ppr 1 60000 ppr F1 32 3B1H PG 2 Rotation Selection 0 Pulse A leads in FWD Direction 1 Pulse B leads in FWD Direction 0 0 1 F1 36 3B5H Encoder 2 PCB Disconnect Detect 0 Disable PG X3 Hardware Disconnect Detect 1 Enable PG X3 Hardware Disconne...

Page 862: ... SA 48 for more information 5B Pos Err Reset ON Resets position deviation to 0 Note Enabled only when set to Position Synchronization mode 5C Pos Reg I Reset ON Resets the integral value of the position controller to 0 Note Enabled only when set to Position Synchronization mode 5D Slave Trigger Inputs the position detection switch for the slave Select whether to input the switch as N O or N C with...

Page 863: ...setting value of SA 64 or less The output turns OFF under the following circumstances The accumulated distance has exceeded the total value of SA 63 and SA 64 when the first trigger was detected A fault occurred and the slave stopped Or position deviation was cleared or disabled The Advance Slave or Retard Slave command was input 4 4 H3 Multi Function Analog Input Settings H3 02 H3 06 H3 10 Settin...

Page 864: ...l input is set to 55 Ratio 2 Select and that digital input is turned ON 1 0 65535 10 SA 39 1AC1 Expert Pos Accum Select Selects how to accumulate position deviation of the slave drive 0 Only During Run 1 Always 0 0 1 10 SA 40 1AC2 RUN Expert Position Units Selects the unit for Position Error U9 18 0 cnts 1 rev 2 deg 3 rad Note Enabled only when set to Position Synchronization mode 0 0 3 11 SA 41 1...

Page 865: ...Enabled only when set to Position Synchronization mode 4096 cnt 0 to 65535 cnt 13 SA 47 1AC9 Expert Slave Dev Sel Selects the slave drive operation when position deviation exceeds the setting value of SA 46 0 No Detection 1 Alarm Only 2 Coast to Stop 2 0 2 14 SA 48 1ACA Expert MOP Mem Pwr Off Selects the handling of the MOP adjustment value when the power supply is turned OFF 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ...

Page 866: ...Enables and disables Alignment 0 Alignment Disable 1 Manual Align 2 Auto Align at Start 3 Continuous Align 4 Window Align 0 0 4 16 SA 62 1AD3 RUN Expert Align Trim Rate Sets the speed variation range when compensating for the deviation in position between Master Trigger and Slave Trigger Increasing the setting value shortens the compensation time and decreasing the setting value lengthens the comp...

Page 867: ... maximum Alignment speed Alignment processing will not be performed when the motor is running at the speed of the setting value or greater Use this parameter to restrict Alignment processing at high speeds where accuracy decreases Setting this parameter to 0 0 Hz disables the function 0 0 Hz 0 0 400 0 Hz 24 SA 69 1ADA RUN Expert Align Trg Window Sets the judgment condition of U9 23 Window Counts w...

Page 868: ...plays the count value every 5 ms of the master encoder pulses input to the slave This monitor can be used to check the receive status of encoder pulses Note Enabled only when set to Position Synchronization mode 10 V cnt 5 ms Maximum Output Frequency E1 04 cnt U9 17 1A70 Expert Slave Cts 5ms Displays the count value every 5 ms from the encoder of the slave drive This monitor is used only to check ...

Page 869: ...etwork communications register 1A71 4 Refer to the manual for a description of parameters determined by A1 02 Table 4 1 MEMOBUS Registers Register No Description Unit 15DDH Gear ratio adjustment over network communications Allows the gear ratio to be adjusted over network communications The digital gear ratio is the total value of the parameter setting value SA 41 analog input value communication ...

Page 870: ...n though the slave is stopped by the application set SA 39 to 0 Only During Run The master input frequency is larger than Maximum Output Frequency E1 04 of the slave Set E1 04 to a value 10 larger than the maximum input frequency of the master PL Loss of Position The slave motor is locked Check if the machine runs normally and if the slave motor is locked When Pos Accum Select SA 39 is set to 1 th...

Page 871: ...EZZ023536 1 16 YASKAWA AC Drive CR700 Supplemental Manual Load Share Software Version PRG 010XX Table of Contents Revision History 2 Basic Specifications 3 Function Details 3 Parameter List 14 ...

Page 872: ...EZZ023536 2 16 Revision History Revision Revised Content Date First Edition 2017 08 ...

Page 873: ...a fall detector or overspeed detector for safety General Safety Install a holding brake Implement safety measures such as fall prevention on the machine side Ensure that the holding brake will be applied by an external sequence when there is an emergency or the power supply is turned OFF Implement a safety circuit that uses the fault relay of this product to apply the holding brake when a fault oc...

Page 874: ...put Method Using MEMOBUS Modbus Communications Input the Forward Run or Reverse Run command to the master and slave drives and control running and stopping those drives by writing data to drive register address 0001H operation signal Refer to the CR700 Technical Manual to connect the MEMOBUS Modbus communications to the drives Inputting Frequency Reference The master receives the frequency referen...

Page 875: ...terminal FM to Load Share output frequency H4 02 100 H4 07 1 10 V H4 04 908 Sets the function of terminal AM to Load Share output torque The output signal type can be changed with SA 03 H4 05 50 H4 08 1 10 V Slave SA 01 2 Multi Function Analog Input Setting Values Parameter Setting Value Description Input Gain Signal Level Parameter Setting Value Parameter Setting Value H3 02 0 Sets the function o...

Page 876: ...r Addresses for Load Share Master Register No Description 826H U9 07 Load Share SFS Output The unit is set with o1 03 Frequency Display Unit Selection 827H U9 08 Load Share Torque Output 0 1 signed Operation Register Addresses for Load Share Slave Register No Description 0001H Run command bit 0 When H5 12 0 Forward Run Stop 1 Forward Run 0 Stop When H5 12 1 Run Stop 1 Run 0 Stop bit 1 When H5 12 0...

Page 877: ...itored with U9 11 Load Share automatically adjusts the output frequency on the slave based on the frequency and torque signal input from the master to balance the load between the master and slave The torque signal input from the master is also used as the torque limit on the slave The following diagram shows the configuration of Load Share for the slave Figure 3 6 Control Block Diagram of Load Sh...

Page 878: ...Frequency D3 Jump Frequency L3 Stall Prevention during Acceleration and Deceleration When Load Share is enabled Proportional Integral Control L7 07 1 and Proportional Only L7 07 0 are invalid as the setting of L7 07 Torque Limit during Accel Decel Load Share is disabled when the following references are input Ensure that the following references are simultaneously input to the master and slave Set...

Page 879: ...ault Setting SA 03 Torque Signal Select 0 1 0 Note The SA 03 parameter on the master and slave must be set to the same value 0 Internal torque reference Uses U1 09 as the torque signal between the master and slave 1 Motor secondary current Uses U6 01 as the torque signal between the master and slave SA 04 Torque Limit Select Enables and disables the Torque Limit function for the slave Enable this ...

Page 880: ...Load Share when the absolute value of the master or slave torque signal torque current is greater than start level 1 Set this parameter to 0 0 to keep slave Load Share constantly enabled This parameter is set as a percentage of motor rated torque No Name Setting Range Default Setting SA 09 Load Share on level1 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 Figure 3 7 Switching Load Share between Enabled and Disabled No Name Se...

Page 881: ...10 Load Share on level2 0 0 to 100 0 0 0 Figure 3 8 Switching Load Share between Enabled and Disabled The following table gives the relationship between enabling and disabling Load Share when the conditions for Load Share On Lvl1 Lvl2 are satisfied Table 3 1 Relationship between Enabling and Disabling Load Share Start Level 1 Condition ON Start Level 1 Condition OFF Start Level 2 Condition ON Enab...

Page 882: ... Name Setting Range Default Setting SA 20 Speed Gain 0 000 to 10 000 1 000 SA 21 Slip Gain Sets the slip gain to improve speed accuracy when the slave is operating Normally there is no need to change from the default setting However adjust it in the following circumstances Increase the setting value when the motor speed is lower than the target value Reduce the setting value when the motor speed i...

Page 883: ...A 24 Slip Regulator Output Limit Sets the limit value on slip adjustment output for the slave This parameter sets the output limit as a percentage of E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency No Name Setting Range Default Setting SA 24 Slip Regulator Output Limit 0 000 to 20 000 10 000 SA 25 Load share output Filter Time Sets the primary delay time of Load Share output for the slave Increase the setting valu...

Page 884: ...mit Bias V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV Sets the offset amount of the torque limit reference for the slave 10 100 to 100 9 SA 06 1AAF 2 Expert Torque Filter Time V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV Sets the primary delay time of the torque feedback value of the slave Reduce the setting value when the response of Load Share control is slow Increase the setting value when oscillation occurs 0 10 s 0 s to 2 00 s 9 SA 0...

Page 885: ... integral time that is too short can cause oscillation 0 000 s 0 000 s to 60 000 s 13 SA 24 1AB8 RUN 2 Expert Slip Regulator Output Limit V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV Sets the limit value on slip regulator output for the slave 10 000 0 000 to 20 000 13 SA 25 1AB9 RUN 2 Expert Load share output Filter Time V f CL V f OLV CLV AOLV Sets the primary delay time of Load Share output for the slave Increase th...

Page 886: ...Displays the input of the Load Share regulator 10 V Motor rated torque 0 01 7 3 This parameter can be set only when the drive is set to master SA 01 1 4 This parameter can be set only when the drive is set to slave SA 01 2 oPE Errors For parameter setting errors related to this function refer to the following table check the parameter setting that caused the error and then eliminate the cause of t...

Reviews:

No comments